JP2020068941A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To identify whether or not display of a display part is reacting in correspondence with an operation at the time of changing settings in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine equipped with game control means capable of executing a game which can generate a special game state advantageous to a player when a result of the game is a special result includes setting changing means capable of changing a setting value according to settings on the game, and a display part capable of displaying information on the setting value by causing a light emitting member to emit light. The setting changing means includes a first switch for changing the setting value. The game control means can change the setting value in correspondence with an operation of the first switch, and display information on the setting value after the change in the display part. At the time of changing the setting value, the game control means displays intermediate information different from the information on the setting value at least before the change in the display part, and then displays information on the setting value after the change in the display part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine which includes a game control means capable of displaying a game on a display unit and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when a stop result of the game is a special result.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that can change settings (set values) related to game conditions (for example,
Patent Document 1). The set value is associated with the winning probability of the big hit (and the small hit),
Different winning probabilities can be associated with each other by the number of set values.

The information (probability set value) about the set value can be displayed on the performance display device (state display device) provided in the game control means while the setting is being changed (and after the setting is changed).

JP, 2004-135843, A

By the way, depending on the gaming machine, there is a case in which different win probabilities are not associated with all the set values, but the same win probability is associated with a plurality of set values. On the other hand, the probability setting values for display (probability setting values for display) can be confused if they are the same if the related winning probabilities are the same. Therefore, the same display probability setting value may be associated with two setting values adjacent to each other.

In this case, there is no change in the display probability setting value that is displayed even if the switch (or button or operation unit) that changes the setting is operated, and whether the display of the performance display device responds to the operation. There is a problem that it cannot be identified.

It is an object of the present invention to identify whether or not the display on the display unit (performance display device) responds to an operation when changing settings in a gaming machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a game machine is provided which has a game control means capable of executing a game and which can generate a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result. And a display unit capable of displaying information on the set value by causing a light emitting member to emit light. The setting change unit changes the set value. The game control means can change the set value in response to the operation of the first switch, and can display information on the changed set value on the display unit. When the setting value is changed, at least intermediate information different from the information on the setting value before the change is displayed on the display unit, and then the information on the setting value after the change is displayed on the table. To display in the part.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device) responds to the operation at the time of changing the setting.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a figure explaining a transition state at the time of turning on a power supply of a game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a performance display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special process starting port switch common process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing (the first half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing (the latter half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading big hit judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the falling lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a falling probability. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing. It is a table which illustrates the sort of jackpot type. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 1 change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in special figure 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the processing during the special figure 1 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (first half) during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (half) in fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit termination process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading change type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit system command processing. It is a time chart of a setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a table showing an example of reliability of setting suggestion production concerning a 1st embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the big hit according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram of a setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion production concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a time chart of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion production concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the second modified example of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the other setting suggestion production which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a screen transition diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a table | surface which shows the correspondence of the work setting value of a game machine of 2nd Embodiment, the display probability setting value (setting example 1, 2, 3, 4), and production | generation control information. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing of the game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing a display mode of a display probability set value of setting example 2 in a game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing a display mode of a display probability set value of setting example 3 or setting example 4 of a game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 1st modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 2nd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 3rd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 4th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 5th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the example 2 of a setting in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the single command system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the setting change state according to the third embodiment. It is another example of the front view of the game board in the setting change state according to the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of timing of signal output etc. at the time of the special game state of the normal operation concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and a normal restoration by power restoration. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of signal output etc., when a power failure occurs in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and a memory abnormality occurs by power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, normal restoration by power restoration, and shifting to a setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, normal restoration by power restoration, and shifting to a setting change state. Timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output, etc., when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is turned off after the power is normally restored by power restoration, and the state is changed to the setting change state Is.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable via a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

On the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decoration device 1 capable of producing a light emission according to a game state.
8a and 18b are provided. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light-emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided which extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (toward the player). Projection production unit 1
3 is a production device for performing a light emission production or the like according to the progress state of the game. Projection production unit 13
The lighting member disposed inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The production operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the production button 25,
It is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the production pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also during operation of the production operation device by the player.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state means, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable change state, probability change state), big hit state (
It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (number cut type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device has a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in a front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device is the force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area.
It is possible to change the launch force corresponding to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and to launch the game ball in various launch modes with different launch forces. The launch mode includes left striking (normal striking) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and right striking that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit with a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening / closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat-shaped game board body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
With 0a. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30a is
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the. The gaming machine 10,
It is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, a production display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The display device 41 is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the, and a stage portion 40b capable of rolling the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37,
The game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is easy to win in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. Upper production unit 40c and side production unit 40d
Constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right playing area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is achieved by a winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning openings 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 for providing a starting condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. Center case 40
In the game area 32 on the right side of, a normal variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, Hoden) provided with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) below the universal figure starting gate 34. Is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides so as to retract from the front side to the back side to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37.
When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the starting winning port 36 facilitates winning of a game ball when left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 facilitates winning of a game ball when right-handing.

The movable member 37b is a slide opening / closing type ordinary electric accessory, and is operated via the universal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the universal figure changing display game is a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to the open state (the winning easy state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 shortens the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or increases the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to be higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state and the normal gaming state. By increasing the generation time of the prize winning easy state than the prize winning easy state, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Note that the probability change state (
Even when the latent latency change state is excluded), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 to the right of the start winning opening 36, a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7)
There is provided a first special variable winning device 38 (special electric prize) having an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that opens the big winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of the game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower special winning opening, a lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variation winning device 38 makes it easier to win a game ball when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variation winning device 37, a special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3).
A second special variation winning device 39 having an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper special winning opening by rotating the upper end side to the right side by the reference) is provided. Second special variation winning device 39
Is converted from a state where the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and a game ball into the special winning opening By facilitating the inflow of, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting the game ball that has entered the special winning opening. In addition, in the second special variation winning device 39, it becomes easy for the game ball to win when right-handed. The lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the big winning opening switch 43.

Inside the second special variation winning device 39, a specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning hole), the probability changes after the big hit ends (
High probability state, specific game state) is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass only in the case of the probability variation big hit. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. In addition to confirming that the game is to be performed, information (a specific area passing command or the like) indicating that there is a V winning is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the presentation control device 300 displays the V winnings on the display device 4.
It can be notified in 1.

General winning a prize opening 35, starting winning a prize opening 36, normal variation winning a prize device 37, and special variation winning a prize device 38
, 39, when a game ball wins the special winning opening, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the lower game area 32, there is provided an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize. Further, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning devices 38, 39 and their vicinity are LEDs that can emit light when a game ball wins (a board decoration device described later). (A part of 46) is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed on the lower right corner of the game board body 30a outside the game area 32. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), a fluctuation display unit 53 (general figure display, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the universal figure fluctuation display game, and start (holding) of each variable display game Memory display unit for notifying the number of memories (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56
), And have. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. Universal Figure Hold Indicator 56
Is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the collective display device 50 is provided with a first game state display section 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for informing that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal). D7),
The second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state, the probability state of big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on becomes a high probability state. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display section, lamp D9) that indicates that the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38, 39) is displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 are not limited to such segment type display units,
It may be configured by a group of a plurality of LEDs, and when performing variable display, all LEDs provided as a display all turn on and off (all LEDs simultaneously blink) or cyclically turn on (either one). One LED may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs may be turned on / off (blinking) or cyclic lighting. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the public figure indicator 53 is also the special figure 1 indicator 5
1 and the special figure 2 display 52 can be configured appropriately.

The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) that executes a variable display (blinking) that repeats a lighted display and a lighted off display as a symbol (a fourth special symbol described later), and the start of each special symbol variable display game (Holding) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the variation time of the variation display on the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the universal display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 holding LED1, special figure 2 holding LED2) display the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but displays the number of holdings when the jackpot is not in progress (including a case where a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41). To do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning devices 38, 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening won the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 via the.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit / miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination matches the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in a lighted state and a deviation when the light is in a non-illuminated state. By flickering the LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the random number value of the universal figure extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is the hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winnings are allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game,
In addition to being stored with a predetermined upper limit number, the game balls that have won the normal variable winning device 37 are detected as start winning balls of the special figure 2 variable display game, and are stored with a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special figure start prize winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and at the same time, the display device 4 is displayed.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 uses the special figure 2 display 52 to display the special figure 2 based on the winning or the second starting memory to the normal variation winning device 37.
Run the floating display game.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol).

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be put into the execution state simultaneously (both) independently of each other. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in the present embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the outlier result. To do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result.

When a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the variation time by the game processing timer is interrupted, and
Derivation of the result of the variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is finished, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted. ..

In addition, when a game ball is won in the normal variation winning device 37 by right-handing in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variation display game starts to vary, but basically it changes for a long time (long variation, for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this period, it will be forcibly disengaged and stopped.

In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, and the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is repeated (flashing) by repeating the lighting display and the extinguishing display. fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "extinguishing" in the case of off and "lighting" in the case of big hit or small hit.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be in the execution state (running state) at the same time.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the big hit state (
It becomes a special game state). In response to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, the special variation winning device 38, 39, the special winning opening solenoid (38b, 39b) (
By energizing (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning openings provided in the special variation winning devices 38, 39 are wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player has the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variable winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure changing display game As a result, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display pattern, and the small hit state is established. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

At this time, the special variation winning device 38, 39, the special winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b (see FIG.
(See), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time.
In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain a game more than in the big hit state. There is little value (number of balls acquired). In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-described specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. In addition, "
The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. Is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning port 36
a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switches (38a, 39a) in the normal variation winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a magnetic field is generated when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a changing phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10
0 (main board), the game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main board) that controls the game in a centralized manner, and has a CPU section having a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., a CPU 110, a data bus 140 connecting the input unit 120 and the output unit 130, and the like.

The CPU section 110 is a game microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock serving as a reference for a random number generation circuit. DC32V, DC12V, DC5 generated by the power supply device 400 are provided in the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , Game microcomputer 11
1. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 and a power failure monitoring circuit, and control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal for notifying the occurrence and recovery of the power failure to the game control device 100. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be provided on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing the model, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is retained even after the power is supplied to the built-in RAM) or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pushed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated,
Based on this, RAM111c in the game microcomputer 111 and RA in the payout control device 200
Processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like to make it possible to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting relating to the game condition (game). The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value changing switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big winning probability or a small winning probability, but other game conditions (production etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting changing unit (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) relating to the game condition is configured. It should be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a dedicated set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, so that the front frame 12 (main body frame) cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure restoration, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON / OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined by, for example, 6 levels, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), Probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to 0 (setting 1, probability setting 1).
→ setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → It is changed like .... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of description, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting changing state (setting changing mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning with the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

The probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch). The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display device 152. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
An M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values at the time of game control, stores information about games (game information), and stores and retains the stored information even when a power failure occurs. It becomes a holding storage means capable of An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.) and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, the game state is advantageous for the player (special game state)
In the gaming machine 10 that becomes, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not been derived and displayed yet,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display. Refers to the non-display mode. Then, for example, a state in which the variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result form by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result form (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) is provided as a system (type) of reach effects having a different possibility (a different expectation) of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach are set.
It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit to generate random numbers for patterns, fluctuation patterns for special display variable display games (including execution time of variable display games for various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a or an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a executes the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a controls the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 11
The reference numeral 1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win the prize ball. Control for paying out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second start winning opening 37 (normal variation winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, the special variation winning device 38
, 39 special winning opening switch 43 (lower special winning opening switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a
), The high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for inputting a signal of negative logic as described above and converting it to a signal of positive logic of 0V-5V is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
Detects the passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball outlet switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball outlet that discharges the game balls from the special variation winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a switch 63, a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame), and a vibration sensor 6 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10.
The signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is the enable signal CE when the gaming microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on input of touch switch provided on operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
There is provided a first input port 122 which receives a signal from 12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which the noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and the output unit 13 is also provided.
0 is supplied to each port. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. It should be noted that the reset signal RST corresponds to the ports 122 and 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit through the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass product for sale) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is, is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving a signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening). The solenoid 1), the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (the special winning opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variation winning device 39, and the first for outputting the opening / closing data of the lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. Of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

Further, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 has a universal solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b and the like open / close data signal is received, the 1st driver (drive circuit) 138a which generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal, the current supply of the collective display device 50 output from the 3rd output port 135 Side driver 138b for outputting ON / OFF drive signal of segment line, and third driver 138b for outputting ON / OFF drive signal of digit line of current drawing side of collective display device 50 output from fourth output port 136 A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the collective display device 50
The DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth output of external information signal to external information terminal 71
The driver 138d is supplied with 12V DC in order to provide a 12V level to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
9, the gaming microcomputer 111 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and displays the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability set value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls).
Is the total of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that have passed through the outlet 30b. The number of discharged balls counts the signal of the out-ball detection switch 74, etc.
It can be obtained by doing. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), And special variation winning devices 38, 39 (special winning opening) are included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), (
Calculated as (number of balls acquired / number of balls discharged) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the winning character ratio is during the jackpot state, out of the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the big prize hole (= so-called continuous character ratio). The ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (= the big prize hole ratio) out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning a prize and the ordinary variable winning a prize device 37 (the second starting winning a prize) (= the so-called character ratio (general character ratio) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
FIG. 7 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300, like the game microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
A main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. A sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19 is provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321, which is a ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe that can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure
A RAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338, which is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.), are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, and the sound source LSI 314.
To perform reproduction sound instruction, lighting of decoration lamp, drive control of motor and solenoid, management of effect time, and the like.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
To the main control microcomputer 311 to wait for reception of interrupt signals INT0-n and command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
The decorative special figure reservation number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via 31 are received as an effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided therein, a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40) board production device 44 (for example, display device 41)
A board production movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a movable accessory etc. that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display in FIG. The panel display device 46 includes the above-mentioned lamp display device 8
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
32V for driving a motor and a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor and an LED, in order to supply a DC voltage of a desired level to the electronic components controlled by the DC5 that is the power supply voltage of the command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker.

Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, And is supplied to an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like, and resets them. In addition, the production control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state where N45 is connected and the effect control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and stored in the ROM 111b. The judgment result is compared with the judgment value that is present, and it is judged whether or not the general figure variation display game has hit.

Then, on the public figure display, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the general figure variability display game is displayed in which it is stopped. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display the result mode of the off-screen on the general-picture display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game has missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52, the special figure variation display game for stop display is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Make up.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed.
That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game or the like).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening / closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 is opened by the special winning opening solenoid 39b, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening.

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the special winning opening until such condition is achieved, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (repetition) control (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening / closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed such that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. In addition, even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplication support is performed by shortening the state in a redundant manner.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned general figure fluctuation display game (general figure fluctuation time)
It is possible to perform a time-shortening variation to make the second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is set to the first time.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so that

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control such that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure changing display game (general figure probability) to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the normal operation state, the movable member 3
You may set so that 7b may not be opened (universal figure probability is 0). Moreover, you may make it select either the 1st opening aspect or the 2nd opening aspect when it becomes a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can be independently generated, both of them can be simultaneously generated, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change state) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed.
(Setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 8).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 6B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

Although the setting key switch 93 is off when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 11
When 2 is turned on, it shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and R
The AM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 6B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered, and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 is mainly performed in the main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment).
It consists of timer interrupt processing shown in. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as “A ***”.

As shown in FIG. 6A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, the game control device 1 forming the main control means
Waiting time for waiting until the program of the secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from 00 (for example, 3
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and the sub control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
(00, etc.) to form a standby means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the power supply delay timer counts time using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to calculate by excluding the AM area, it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, a situation in which the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112, which are performed when the power is turned on, cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (from A1008 to A).
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a power failure occurs by reading a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (result of A1008 is “Y”), the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

If the power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 (the result of A1008 is “N”)
The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the waiting time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the timer value is 0, the game control device 100 (the result of A1010 is “Y”).
) That is, when the waiting time is over, access to the read / write memory (Read / Write Memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is enabled (A1011), and OFF data is output to all output ports (no output). Set to (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port that is installed in the game microcomputer 111 in advance, and is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator), and a CTC (Counter / Timer C).
ircuit) circuit is started (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 by a frequency dividing circuit and a CP signal based on the frequency-divided signal.
It is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) for U111a and a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 is an RA indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c).
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, the abnormality premise flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (A101
The result of 6 is “Y”), and it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (for example, a game control work area). Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1019). If the checksums match (result of A1019 is “Y”), the RAM is normal and the RAM indicates an abnormality.
The abnormality flag is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is “N” or the result of A1017 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112
It is determined whether or not both switches are on (A1021). When both switches are ON (result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process of changing probability setting in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), the game control device 100 has RAM (here, RAM).
111c) whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality is set (A102).
2). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), step A103
1-A1037 processing during probability setting confirmation (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in steps A1041-1044, or step A1
The processing of 041, A1045, and A1046 when the power is normally turned on (when the power is restored) is executed.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023)
Result is “Y”), a command for main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024).
. The effect control device 300 that has received the command of the main abnormality error notification is the game control device 10
Notify that there was 0 abnormality.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (“E1” in FIG. 9C).
Error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 for display on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying an abnormality to an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to stand by, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1 is performed again.
Wait for the power to be turned on by performing both ON operations of 12). While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112
Both of the ON operations of 1) are not executed, but if the probability setting changing flag is set, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and the processing of A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting is changed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting changing operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 also when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102).
The result of 2 is "Y"), the command of the main abnormality error notification for notifying that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and 7 segments when the game is stopped. The display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the on-data of the security signal is externally output to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. It is output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). Note that, similarly to the above, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. Then, step A10
25 and the processing of A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y
)), Since it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, after clearing the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028). ), A probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (
A1029). If the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N
)), The probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, the command of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1
030) and the process moves to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation process (during the setting confirmation state) is started. A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is used as the effect control device
0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). Note that the count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later, but when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321).
During the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1036 is “N”), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If a power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
The processing at the time of power failure 61 is executed.

As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, it is possible to confirm the setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036)
The result is “Y”), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a notification end command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the notification end command ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (to be described later) of steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041).
. If the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is “Y”), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is set to 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. .. The performance information is derived on the basis of the number of prize balls obtained by winning. For example, the payout rate, the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state), the ratio of the winning character, the number of discharged balls, etc. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1
The result of 041 is “N”), and since both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, normal power-on (power-on) processing is started and power-out recovery processing is executed ( A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power recovery (when power is restored) is saved in the area to be initialized. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to a process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A10.
The processing moves to 47.

The command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for restoration of power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine and suspension of special figures 1 and 2. Number of decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability state command (probability state or low probability state) or probability information command indicating presence / absence of time saving state, special figure variation in predetermined production mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Be done. The game control device 100 need only transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command, for example,
A customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the RAM of the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 is displayed.
Notification of initialization (RAM clear) is performed for 30 seconds. In addition, the command at the time of restoration from a power failure includes a screen designation command that designates the display content of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command to specify the screen is normally under processing for both Toku-zu 1 and 2 (when it is neither changing nor hitting).
, A customer waiting demo command, and a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol) Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of small hit symbol random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of hit random number to determine hit of ordinary figure (random initial value random number) , The initial value of the random number of the falling lottery used in the falling lottery (a random number of the initial value of the falling lottery) is saved as a start value in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A10).
49). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However,
The big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC of timer interrupt processing (
It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2) different from CTC0).

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the hit symbol random number, the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method with +1 or 1, or may be a random method update in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the character ratio and the payout rate) may be calculated. If the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054).
When no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A
1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
. Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 inputs from various sensors and switches, captures signals,
That is, the input processing for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is “Y”), the probability setting changing / confirming process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

The game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A130).
The result of No. 4 is "N"), and based on the output data set in various processes, output process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) is executed (A1306). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1307), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308), a random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower special winning opening switch 38a, and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are monitored to see if there is a normal signal input or an error is monitored. The winning opening switch / state monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes of step A1317 and thereafter are executed.

The game control device 100, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N")
A start opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start opening by the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a is executed (A1312). Then, the special figure 1 game process for performing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game process is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A1315). A segment LED edit process for driving a segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying a special figure variation game and various information regarding a game so as to display desired contents is executed (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is normal or not is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes vibration irregularity monitoring processing for monitoring irregularity due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special winning opening device 38, 39 special winning opening switch 43 (lower special winning opening switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a), specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), remaining ball exit Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. In addition, special variation winning device 3
The game balls that have passed the special winning opening switch 43 of 8, 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharging switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, performance display monitor control processing for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when the timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification are configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "
Y ”), probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A2402), and output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A
2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of the display probability setting value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among hall-related persons, if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 1 in step A1034.
28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is sent to the external information terminal 71.
To (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (A2407)
If the result is “N”), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing / confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100, when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407)
If the result is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “Y”), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

The game control device 100, if it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A240
The result of 8 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2).
409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation processing ends.

The game control device 100, when there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409)
Is “Y”), the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability of the probability setting value area corresponds to the work setting value. The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process ends. A value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value is stored in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered. The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the work setting value. However, the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is “Y”).
)), The value corresponding to the work setting value in the work setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs while changing the settings (A1037
It is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, effect control, or the like is changed to an unintended value when the result is “Y”).

[Display example on performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type when the dot Dp is included) display device. It consists of f, g and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, digit 1 to digit 3 is lit to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, while changing the probability setting, RA
At the digit 0, the display probability setting value is switched to, for example, “1” to “6” and lighted corresponding to the work setting values 0 to 5 that are switched each time the M initialization switch 112 is operated.

In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (the result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0 is set. Turns off. It should be noted that the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not extinguished in the digits 1 to 3.

In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is “Y”).
)) Or when the power is turned off and restarted while changing the probability setting (before the setting change is completed) (A
The result of 1023 is "Y"), and the 7-segment display data error display "E1" when the game is stopped is digit 1
It is lit and displayed by 2 (A1024).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table that monitors winnings to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and acquires a hard random number as a big hit random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start mouth prize to the first start prize hole 36 (A2703). And if there is no starting mouth prize (A
When the result of 2703 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100, when there is a starting opening winning a prize to the first starting winning a prize opening 36 (A2703).
The result is "Y"), whether or not the probability of a big hit is a low-probability state and there is no time saving (a state without normal electric power support), that is, low probability of special map & no time saving (normal game) It is determined whether or not it is in the state (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (during a normal game state). When the probability is low and the time is not reduced (the result of A2704 is “Y”).
), That is, in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

The game control device 100, when the probability of big hit occurrence is not in the low probability state (in the high probability state) or in the state with time saving (the state with universal communication support) (the result of A2704 is “N”), A right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handing instruction display for instructing the right-handing as a warning when there is a starting mouth winning combination in the first starting winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed in. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100, the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2)
A starting mouth 2 winning award monitoring table for monitoring winning a prize is prepared (A2709), and a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number as a big hit random number is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a starting mouth prize to the normal variation winning device 37 (A2711). When there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

The game control device 100, when there is a start opening winning a prize to the normal variation winning device 37 (A271)
The result of 1 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in operation (during normal power operation) (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "
N ”), it is determined whether or not an illegality (universal telephone illegality) for the normal variation winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). If the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that the universal communication fraud is occurring. Ordinary variable winning device 37
If a fraud has occurred against the result (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100, if the fraud for the normal variation winning device 37 is not occurring (A2
The result of 713 is "N"), the table which sets the information of the withdrawal due to the winning in the normal variation winning device 37 (starting mouth 2) is prepared (A2714), and the special figure starting mouth switch common processing is executed (A).
2715), the start opening switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100, when an irregularity is occurring in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2
If the result of 712 is “Y”), the process of step A2713 is not executed, and the processes of steps A2714 and A2715 are executed.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, the special figure starting port switch common process (A270) in the starting port switch monitoring process described above.
8, A2715) will be described in detail. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. Special process starting port switch common processing, starting port 1 switch 36
This is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the switch a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output frequency overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”),
Save the updated value in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904),
The processing moves to 2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then, (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a falling lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high-probability state with a special hit jackpot probability to a low-probability state (A2912), and stores the falling lottery random number with a falling lottery random number. Save in the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2) (A2914). If the winning is not for the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, when it is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2914 is “Y”), a small winning symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A
2915), save in the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2916).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
918). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as effect commands (A2919), and effect command setting processing (A292).
0) is executed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended. The decoration special figure reservation number command is
With the opening 1 switch 36a, the decoration special figure 1 hold number command, and the opening 2 switch 37a
Then, it is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit for the starting storage is provided. Also,
The starting memory means (game control device 100) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. , Various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the special figure holding information determination process (A2918) in the special figure starting port switch common process described above.
) Will be described in detail. 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the first half and the second half of the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing (prefetch processing, predetermination processing). The special figure reservation information determination processing is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 starting memories generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (during a special game state) (A3001). If it is a big hit (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. When it is not a big hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) is a winning (A3002). If the winning is to the starting opening 1 (the result of A3002 is "Y"), that is, if the winning is to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), the pre-reading processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed. To do this, step A3004
Move to subsequent processing.

The game control device 100, when the winning of the starting opening 1 is not (the result of A3002 is “N”),
Whether or not the probability of a big hit is a low-probability state and there is no time saving (state without normal electric power support), that is, whether there is a special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game state) judge(
A3003). When the special map low probability & no time saving is being performed (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special map pending information determination processing is ended. That is, the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2) in the normal gaming state
If it is a winning a prize, the special figure reservation information determination processing is ended without executing the prefetch processing (preliminary determination processing). In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game often changes for a long time (long fluctuation) and is often forced to end with a deviation result, so a prefetching process (preliminary determination process) so as not to be wasted. Do not run.

If the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & no time saving (the result of A3003 is "
N ”), that is, in a case other than the normal game state (time saving state or probability changing state), if the winning is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2), the prefetching process (preliminary determination process) is executed, so step A3004. Move to subsequent processing.

Then, the game control device 100 starts the prefetching process (preliminary determination process) and determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3004).
). When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure high probability is in progress (the result of A3004 is “Y”), it is determined whether the random number for the falling lottery prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of the falling win (A3005), and the prefetch falling lottery corresponding to the judgment result An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and effect command setting processing is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low-probability determination flag for performing pre-reading big hit determination in the low-probability state (A3008). If the special map is not in high probability (A3
The result of 004 is “N”), and since there is no fall from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, the prefetch process regarding the fall is not executed (A3005-A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3008.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a pre-reading big hit judging process described later based on the big hit random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and judges whether the result of the pre-reading big hit judging process is a big hit (A3010). ). If the judgment result is a big hit (A3
The result of 010 is “Y”), and the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a or starting port 2)
Set the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the switch 37a) (A3011),
The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3012), and step A3
The processing moves to 019.

The game control device 100, if the determination result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is out (A3
The result of 010 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not it is a winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2) (A3013). In case of winning the start opening 2 (the result of A3013 is “Y”),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the start opening 2, a small hit determination process, which will be described later, is executed as a look-ahead process for the small hit (A3014).
It is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3017) and the process proceeds to step A3019.

If the game control device 100 is not a prize for the starting opening 2 (the result of A3013 is "N")
Since small hits cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game, out-of-stop symbol information is set (A3018). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. In addition, if the result of the determination is not a small hit due to the winning of the starting opening 2 (A3
The result of 015 is “N”), that is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3018). Then, the process proceeds to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017, A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a low-probability read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3021).
).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing pre-reading big hit determination in the high-probability state (A3022), and similarly to A3009-A3018, A3023-A3.
The processing of 032 is executed. First, a pre-reading jackpot determination process described below is executed (A3023),
Whether or not the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is a big hit is determined (A3024). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch (starting mouth 1 switch 36a or starting mouth 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

The game control device 100, if the determination result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is out (A3
The result of 024 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not it is a winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2) (A3027). In the case of winning the start opening 2 (the result of A3027 is “Y”),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning a prize in the starting opening 2, a small hit determination process described below is executed as a look-ahead process for the small hit (A3028).
It is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). When the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3031) and the process proceeds to step A3033.

The game control device 100, when the winning is not in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3027 is “N”)
Since a small hit cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game, out-of-stop symbol information is set (A3032). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. In addition, if the result of the determination is not a small hit due to the winning of the starting opening 2 (A3
The result of 029 is “N”), that is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3032). Then, the process proceeds to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a special figure high probability (A3033). If the special map is in high probability (A3033)
Result is "Y"), the stop symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034),
The process moves to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. If the special map is not in high probability (A30
The result of 33 is "N"), without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area, step A
The processing shifts to 3035.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability prefetch stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information as a production command (A3035).
, Production command setting processing is executed (A3036).

Subsequently, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3037), and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed as prefetching. (A3038). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), effect command setting processing is executed (A3040), and special figure hold information determination processing is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 receives both the read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state, the read-ahead stop symbol command ( Low probability) is used to execute the prefetch symbol system command processing (FIG. 51), and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, the prefetch symbol design command processing (high probability) is used. (FIG. 51) may be performed.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, the pre-reading big hit determination processing (A3009, A3023) in the special figure reservation information determination processing
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-reading big hit determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3101), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A310).
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3107), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A3
The result of 102 is "N"), and it is determined whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (A3).
103). If the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (result of A3103 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high-probability determination flag (when it is the low-probability determination flag) (A3
The result of 103 is "N", and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3).
105).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3106). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3107). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3106 is “N”), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the pre-reading big hit determination process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first of all, the special figure 1 showing that the special figure 1 variable display game is being suspended.
It is determined whether the game interruption flag is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (result of A3201 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not it is in the state or in the small hit state (A3202). Toku-zu 2 In case of neither big hit state nor small hit state of variable display game (result of A3202 is "N"),
The special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process,
The detection of a game ball is monitored by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Then, the specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
1 is subtracted) (A3205). The Toku-zu 1 game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3202 is "Y"), steps A3203 and A32
The processing of step A3205 is performed without performing the processing of 04. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). When the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3217.

The game control device 100, when the special processing 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special processing 1
The special figure 1 game sequence branch table that is referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3).
208). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 1 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3209).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A3209, the game control device 100,
Special figure 1 The variation start of the variable display game is monitored, and the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is set, the effect is set, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the variation of special figure 1 is set. (1) Execute normal processing (A3210). Note that details of the special process 1 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

If the game process number is “1” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
The special figure 1 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A3211). The details of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “2” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
Special Figure 1 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and process during the fanfare / interval The special figure 1 displaying process for setting the information necessary for the execution is executed (A3212). The details of the processing during display of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is “3” in step A3209, the game control device 100,
The fanfare / interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the special winning opening (A3213). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A3209, the game control device 100:
If the big hit round is not the final round, set the interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A3214).

If the game process number is “5” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
A special winning opening remaining ball process is executed to set an interval time and an ending time, and to set information necessary for performing a big hit ending process (A3215).

If the game process number is “6” in step A3209, the game control device 100:
The special figure 2 game wait time value (which will be described later) is set, and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is executed to set the information necessary to execute the special figure 1 normal process (A3216). In addition, special figure 1
Details of the big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1 The symbol variation control processing relating to the container 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid 86
A lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A32.
02 to A3216 without performing the processing of A3216, the special figure 1 for controlling the fluctuation of the indicator 51
After preparing the fluctuation control table (A3217), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219). The game process ends. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol may be apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state (A3301). When the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game is not in progress (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played with the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A3304). The Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game (A3301)
Result of “Y”), the process of steps A3302 and A3303 is not performed, and step A33
The processing of 04 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3323.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), that is, when the game control device 100 has timed up or has already timed up, the special figure 2
It is determined whether the number of times the game processing timer is repeated is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"),
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the long variation timer value (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (
A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the variation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308. The timer value for long fluctuation is counted by the number of times by the processing of 1, and a timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 variable display game is prepared.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is "Y") and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3306 is "Y"). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 2 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (A3311).

If the game processing number is “0” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100,
Special figure 2 The special figure that monitors the fluctuation start of the variable display game and sets the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing process. 2 Perform normal processing (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “1” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
The special figure 2 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A3313). The details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

If the game process number is “2” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
Special Figure 2 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening pattern of each big hit, and process during the fanfare / interval. The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the information necessary for the execution is executed (A3314). The details of the processing during the display of special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the game process number is “3” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
The fanfare / interval processing for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and setting the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to the processing executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

If the game processing number is “4” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100,
If the big hit round is not the final round, set the interval command while setting the ending command if it is the final round, and set the information necessary to perform the big winning opening remaining ball processing. Medium processing is executed (A3316).

If the game process number is “5” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
A special winning opening remaining ball process is executed to set the interval time and ending time, and to set the information necessary to perform the big hit ending process (A3317).

If the game process number is “6” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
Special figure 2 The special figure 2 big hit ending processing which sets the information and the like which is necessary in order to execute processing is executed (A3318). The details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

If the game processing number is “7” in step A3311, the gaming control device 100,
The small hit fanfare middle processing is executed to set the opening time of the special winning opening, update the number of times of opening, and set the information necessary for performing the small hit processing (A3319). Details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

If the game process number is “8” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
Processing for setting a small hit end command, processing for setting small information for performing small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are executed (A3320).

If the game processing number is “9” in step A3311, the game control device 100,
A small hit remaining ball process for setting the ending time and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process is executed (A3321).

When the game process number is “10” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display device 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2 The symbol variation control processing relating to the container 52 is executed (A3324), and the lever solenoid 86
A lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal process of Toku-zu 1.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401). If the special display 1 variable display game cannot start changing (if the change cannot start) (the result of A3401 is "N"), the special processing 1 game processing number "0" is set as the special processing 1 game processing number. (A3416), save in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). In addition, here, from the end of fluctuation of the big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 2 big hit), and in the special figure 2 variable display game. From the end of the variation of the small hit (during the processing during the display of special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the processing of ending the small figure 2 small hit), it is considered that the variation display game of the special figure 1 cannot be started.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401)
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether the left-handing instruction has been informed (A3402). If the left-handing instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handing instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (A34
If the result of 02 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handing instruction notification is not completed based on the left-handing instruction notification flag (result of A3402 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and effect command setting processing. Is executed (A3404), and a left-handing instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handing instruction is informed (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like is set (A340).
5).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3406).
. When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3406 is “Y”), the special figure 1 normal process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

Game control device 100, when the special figure 1 reservation number is not 0 (result of A3406 is "N"),
A variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3408). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). Then, a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A34).
12), the effect command setting process is executed (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing or ((special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, a special figure 1 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (
A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 ordinary process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501). If the special display 2 variable display game cannot start changing (if it cannot start changing) (the result of A3501 is “N”), the special processing 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special processing 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the fluctuation of the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (during the processing of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the big hit operation (the special figure 1 big hit end processing), the change of the special figure 2 variable display game It is said that it cannot be started.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501)
The result is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or time saving state is prepared as a production command. (A3503), effect command setting processing is executed (A3504). Then, special figure 2
Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as a production command (A3506), and executes production command setting processing ( A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3508), and executes production command setting processing. Yes (A3509
). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game number command can grasp the number of times of time reduction fluctuation.

Next, the game control device 100 sets information during fluctuation of special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (
A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

If the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3502 is “Y”), the game control device 100,
It is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 (A3512). Special Figure 1 When the number of reservations is 0 (
The result of A3512 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3513). When Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A3513 is "N")
), It is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3514). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), the customer waiting demo flag is set (A3515).
.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes an effect command setting process (A3517).
The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A
3518), and save it in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3512 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, and therefore the special figure 2 is not prepared and the special figure 2 As the game process number, the special process number “0” of special figure 2 normal process is set (A3518), and the special process number 2 game process number area of the RWM is saved (A3519). In addition, when Toku-zu 1 is changing (A35
13 result is "Y"), or when the customer waiting demonstration has started (A3514 result is "Y").
)), The special figure 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special figure 2 game processing number without preparing a customer waiting demo command (A3518), and the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM is set. Save (A3519).

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a).
The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). Then, the falling lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
A3605a), special figure 1 stop design (design information) related to the setting of special figure 1 stop design (symbol information) (A
3606a), a special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3608a). ). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3609a) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A3610a) is executed. Then, a time-reduced variation count updating process for updating the time-reduction variation count is executed (A3).
611a).

Next, the game control device 100, as the process number, shifts to “1
Is set (A3612a), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3).
613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (ON data of the special symbol 1 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3616a). Then, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking period of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A3617).
a), the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-illuminated symbol) is saved in the changing symbol number region of the special figure 1 (A3618a), and the special figure 1 changing start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a variation of the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 18) in which “big hit flag 1” is replaced with “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 1” is replaced with “special figure 2”. Since a process similar to the Toku-zu 1 variation start process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, respectively.

[Falling lottery processing]
Next, the falling lottery process (A3604) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing
a, A3604b) will be described in detail. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the falling lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high-probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (A3701). When it is not within the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is “N”), the falling lottery process is ended.

When the special figure high probability is in effect (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 has the value of the falling lottery random number of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value. It is determined whether or not (A3702). When it is less than the lower limit value of the falling lottery (the result of A3702 is "Y
)), And ends the falling lottery process. When it is equal to or more than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the upper limit value of the falling lottery (the result of A3703 is “Y”)
Then, the falling lottery process ends.

The game control device 100, when the falling lottery upper limit determination value or less (the result of A3703 is "N")
), Because the value of the target falling lottery random number becomes a value between the falling lottery upper limit judgment value and the falling lottery lower limit judgment value, the processing at the time of winning the falling lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end of RWM is given. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A3704). Here, the signal for the high probability end is
There are two big hits of off data (off signal) and four big hits of off data (off signal). As a result, a signal related to the high probability end is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of high probability and shortening of time in the test signal output data area (A3705). High probability & signal regarding the end of time saving, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1
The off-data of the variation time shortening state signal, the special symbol 2 off-data of the variation time shortening state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without saving time is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the falling lottery process is ended. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probability variation state (with a high probability of special map), the falling lottery is executed at the start of each special map variation display game, and when the falling lottery is won, the probability variation state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low probability). Falling processing (A3704-A3708) of falling to the stochastic state is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM, and is prepared (A3802). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A3803).
.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3804). Jackpot flag 2
Is not a jackpot (result of A3804 is "N"), based on the obtained jackpot random value,
Special figure 1 The big hit decision processing which decides whether or not the variable display game is the big hit is executed (A38
05), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is executed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. ..

The game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3804 is "Y
)) Or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (
A3901), the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902).
Next, load the big hit random number from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of RWM,
Prepare (A3903). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Then, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3905). Jackpot flag 1
Is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random number value,
Special figure 2 The big hit decision processing which decides whether or not the variable display game is the big hit is executed (A39
06), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). If the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved at step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is executed. finish. The big hit flag 2 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area), so that it is possible to prevent the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 from being big hits at the same time. ..

The game control device 100, when the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A3905 is "Y
)) Or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is “N”), whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the obtained big hit random number value. A small hit determination process for determining whether or not is executed (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit (A3910). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit judgment and the big hit judgment). Special figure 2
When the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is “Y”), step A3901
The small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved (A
3911) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. When the special display 2 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the jackpot determination processing (such as jackpot flag 1 setting processing and jackpot flag 2 setting processing)
Details of (A3805, A3906) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A4001), and judges whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

The game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A400
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007), and the big hit judgment process ends.

Further, the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (A4
The result of 002 is “N”), and it is determined whether or not there is a special figure high probability (A4003). If it is in the high probability of special figure (the result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, if the special map high probability is not in progress (A
The result of 4003 is “N”), and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A
4005).

After setting the upper limit determination value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is common to the small hit determination processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) should be the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the range of values (between the lower judgment value and the upper judgment value). In the present embodiment,
The small hit random number is not provided independently, but the big hit random number is also used for the small hit determination, but it is also possible to provide an original small hit random number.

Game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (A
The result of 4101 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A4103), and the small hit determination process ends.

When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. Is determined (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A
The result of 4102 is “Y”), and the deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is “N”), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, Small hit probability, Fall probability]
25 (a), (b), and (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-described large hit determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24) and falling lottery process (FIG. 20). It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the falling probability of.

In the example of FIG. 25 (a), the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the probability setting value 1 to
It is the same regardless of 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, jackpot probability in low probability state (low probability state)
Tends to increase as the probability setting value increases (becomes higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the easier it is for a big hit to occur, which is advantageous to the player. As described above, only one of the big hit probability in the low-probability state and the big hit probability in the high-probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value of FIG. 23 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The big hit probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number in accordance with the probability setting value, in addition to the upper limit judgment value.

Also, with setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (
The high-probability state) and the jackpot probability (low-probability state) are the same. Note that the jackpot probability may be different for all settings. Moreover, even if the jackpot probability is the same, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to each probability setting value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, or regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value in FIG. 24 divided by the range of the value of the big hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variable display game, a small hit does not occur (the small hit probability is zero). It is also possible to have a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the example of FIG. 25C, the falling probability as the winning probability of the falling lottery is the probability setting value (setting).
It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, and whether it is a special figure 1 variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game. is there. The falling probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the falling lottery upper limit determination value and the falling lottery lower limit determination value of FIG. 20 by the range of the value of the falling lottery random number.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether or not big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4201). Jackpot flag 1
Is a big hit (the result of A4201 is "Y"), the big hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4203), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 1 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4204). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A42
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is a special map display (here, special map 1 display 5
It is for setting the stop symbol in 1) and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit ending process and the special figure 2 big hit ending process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4208), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4209). Then, the process proceeds to step A4212. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of falling off in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4210).
), The out-of-stop symbol design pattern is saved in the symbol design pattern area (A4211). Then, the process proceeds to step A4212.

After the steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes effect command setting processing (A4213). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting processing ends.

[Special map 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether or not big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4301). Jackpot flag 2
Is a big hit (the result of A4301 is “Y”), the big hit design random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit design random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4303), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 2 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4304). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A43
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). A stop pattern is a special map display (here, special map 2 display 5
It is for setting the stop symbol in 2) and the stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit ending process and the special figure 2 big hit ending process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4308), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4309). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is present in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether it is saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4311). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit symbol table (A
4312), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is obtained and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (A4313). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected.
Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit, the game control device 100 (the result of A4310 is "N
)), The stop symbol number at the time of detachment is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area (A4315), and the detachment stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317.

After the steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes effect command setting processing (A4318). The decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A4320). ), Special figure 2 small hits random number storage area (for number of holding 1) cleared to 0 (A4
321). After that, the special figure 2 stop design setting process ends.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning hole 36, and the detection of the game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game based on the above. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special design jackpot pattern distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table exemplifying the distribution of the types of big hits of the special drawing 1 and 2 variable display games controlled by the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (big hit symbol distribution). Is. The sort of jackpot type is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines types of big hits corresponding to the big hit stop design numbers and their distribution ratios acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of big hits are common to the special display 1 and 2 variable display games, and are 10R probability change big hits and 4R.
There is a definite variation big hit, 10R normal big hit (100 times of time saving). Other than that, a 10R normal big hit (time saving times 0 times) or the like may be provided.

In addition, the distribution ratios of the 10R probability variation big hit, the 4R probability variation big hit, and the 10R regular variation big hit (100 times of shortening time) are 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. The difference is 50%, 10%, and 40%. The distribution ratio can be changed as appropriate.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation pattern selection information table (A4401).
). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuations. The first half change is the change mode before the start of reach,
The second-half variation is a variation mode after the reach state is reached and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reserved number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half variation according to the special figure 1 reserved number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403)
Result is “Y”), the process of step A4404 is not performed, the first half offset data acquired in step A4402 is not updated or converted, and the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2).
) Is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of a big hit is in a low probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without normal electric power support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time saving (normal game). It is determined whether or not it is in the state (A4501). Special map low probability & no time saving (A
When the result of 4501 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4505.

If the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & no time saving (the result of A4501 is "N
That is, in the case of the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is the time reduction final variation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is a final (eg, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-saving state. When the special figure variation display game to be started from now is the time variation final variation (result of A4502 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time reduction final variation (result of A4502 is “N”) (A
4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuation, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuation. ..

On the other hand, when the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is a high probability final fluctuation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the player wins the falling lottery (FIG. 20) and falls from the certainty-changed state (high-probability state) to the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

The game control device 100, when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (result of A4505 is “Y”) or when it is a time reduction final variation (A450).
The result of No. 2 is “Y”), and in order to secure the time for notifying that it is the final fluctuation, the first half offset data and the latter half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511. ..

When the special figure variation display game to be started is not a high-probability final variation (result of A4505 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit ( A4507). Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (A450
If the result of No. 7 is "N"), the first half offset data for deviation / small hit of Special Figure 2 at low probability is set (A4508), and the process proceeds to step A4510. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (result of A4507 is "Y"), the first half offset data for big hit of special figure 2 at a low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is changed for a long time (long change).

Note that in the probability change state (high probability state of special map) and the time saving state, the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special map 2 variable display game is not set. Short fluctuations compared to long fluctuations). As a result, in the probability change state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which a small hit frequently occurs due to the special figure 2 variable display game becomes possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable allocation information 1) in the variable allocation information 1 area of the RWM (A451
1), the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601a).
), The address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (
A4602a), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 and prepared (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A4604a). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (A4604)
The result of “a” is “Y”), and the 2-byte allocation process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4
605a), if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not off (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is “N”), the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte sorting process and the sorting process are processes for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hit type and the hit type, and the random number for distribution has a 1-byte size for the hit type and has a 2-byte size for the hit type. The hit size is 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate per hit of the special display 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a win (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the variation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607a). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is stored as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and distribution processing based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). .. Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611a),
A table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the latter half variation number (A4612a).
. Subsequently, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the allocation,
The first half variation number area is saved (A4616a), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process ends.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in which "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (FIG. 31) is replaced with "special figure 2". Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b to A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a to A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3 in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing
610a, A3610b) will be described in detail. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the used special map 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Furthermore, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (
A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500
6), the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). continue,
It is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). Toku-zu 1 If information regarding the variable display game is not being set (result of A5008 is “N”), toku-zu 2
Since information is being set regarding the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009).

When the game control device 100 does not start the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009)
Result is "N"), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50).
10) When the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is started (the result of A5009 is “Y”),
Special Figure 2 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not sufficient for the 2-byte timer is varied, so that the predetermined repetition number (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (millisecond), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, by saving the above added value to the special figure game processing timer area, 60000 ms
When the timer of ec (60 seconds) is set and the number of times of repeating 9 times is saved,
The timer is subtracted in the timer interrupt process (particularly, the special figure 2 game process (FIG. 15)) (A3
304), when the time is up (the result of A3305 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and the game processing timer is set again to the long fluctuation timer value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) (A3308). ). As a result, a long-varying special figure 2 variable display game,
It is possible to set a long fluctuation time of 60000 msec + (60000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (repetition count = 0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A50
The result of step 08 is “Y”), and the step A5012
Move to.

After the steps A5008, A5010, A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012) and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reserved number or special figure 2 reserved number) of the target special figure variation display game by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure variation. The contents of the random number storage area relating to the display game are shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (
A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction change count update process]
Next, details of the time shortening variation number update processing (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time shortening variation count updating process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (during the probability change state) (
A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress.
When it is in the high probability of special figure (the result of A5101 is “Y”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

When the special figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A5101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the special figure time saving (time saving state) (A5102). When the special figure game mode flag area is set with the time saving flag (in this embodiment, the special figure low probability & time saving flag), it can be determined that the special time saving is in progress. When it is not during the special figure time saving (the result of A5102 is “N”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

The game control device 100 updates the number of times of time shortening fluctuation by -1 (subtracts only 1 when it is during special time saving and short time (with a low probability of special map and with normal power support) (result of A5102 is "Y"). )
(A5103). The initial value of the number of times of shortening time reduction is the number of times that the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to 100 times, for example (big hit end setting process 2 described later).
. Further, even when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to change, the time shortening change count is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of times of time reduction variation is 0 (A5
104). When the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5104 is “N”), that is,
When the time saving state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 ends the time reduction variation number updating process. When the number of time shortening fluctuations is 0 (A5104
The result is “Y”), and the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving end in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal related to the end of the time saving is the off data of two big hit signals. As a result, the signal related to the end of the time saving is external information as the external information terminal 71.
As a result, it is output to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signal related to the time saving end here is, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal,
Ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal off data, ordinary electric auditors product 1 opening extension state signal off data.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A
5107), the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special drawing game mode flag area of the RWM (A5108), and the general drawing no time saving flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (A5108).
5109), and the time-reducing variation count updating process ends.

In this way, by executing the time shortening variation number updating process in the second embodiment, the normal game state (special figure low probability and normal state with special figure low probability and normal electric power support) is appropriately changed from the time saving state (state with low special figure probability and normal electric power support). It is possible to shift to the state without power support).

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5301).
The number of times of symbol determination number output is used in the symbol determination number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special figure variable display game is determined to the external device. To be done. Next, the decoration special drawing 1 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5).
303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5).
305).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 1 is set (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is the deviating symbol of the special figure 1.
00 msec, 2000 msec if the big hit symbol of Toku-zu 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (the result of A5307 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 1 stop symbol Load from the save area and save to the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5
322).

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed).
Or not (A5308). Toku-zu 2 is not changing (result of A5308 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A5319. Toku-zu 2 is also changing (A53
The result of 08 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not a special figure 2 display process described later is being executed (A5).
309).

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is "
Y ”), and the process proceeds to step A5311. When the special figure 2 process is not being executed (
The result of A5309 is “N”), and the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by +1 (A5310). Next, as the display time of the special figure 2, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure + 4 msec) is set (A5311), and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3304), and therefore is added. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 1 and the stop symbol of special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of the special figure 2 has already been started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares a falling edge design command of the decoration special drawing 2 as a production command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special drawing 2 command area (A5314), and executes production command setting processing ( A5315). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area,
The processing for stopping the special display 2 variable display game as a result of the deviation is executed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the result of deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 changing process which is control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special map 2 (end of special display 2 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (while the special figure 2 is changing), if the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is lost. As a result, it will be forced to end fluctuation (forced end).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is up (A3206). Since the result is executed "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 1 command from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320). The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended. In the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 game process number area is saved, the process number "2" is saved, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the like. Perform the necessary processing to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Moreover, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during change of the special figure 2).
Even if the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game constitutes a forced ending means for forcibly ending with the result.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5401).
The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to the external device. .. Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and effect command setting processing is executed (A540).
3). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and effect command setting processing is executed (A540).
5).

Next, the game control device 100, as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2,
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of special figure 2 is set (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol of the special figure 2.
00 msec, 600 msec for the big hit design of Special Figure 2, 136 msec for the small hit design of Special Figure 2. It should be noted that the display time of the outlying symbol and the big hit symbol of special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information (stop symbol number at the time of off) saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5
427).

The game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not missing (A5407)
The result is “N”), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed) (A5408). Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A5408 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5423. Toku-zu 1 is also changing (result of A5408 is "Y
)), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (A540
If the result of 9 is "N"), that is, if it is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (
(A5412), the decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414). Then, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is in execution (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be changed to the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that was interrupted after the end of the small hitting operation relating to the special figure 2 variable display game The floating display game can be restarted.

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A540
The result of 9 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (A54).
10). When the processing during the display of special figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5415. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (result of A5410 is “N”), the symbol decision number output count is updated by +1 (A5411). Next, as the display time of special figure 1, a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 mse
The display time of c) is set (A5415), and the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game process (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3205).
), Is an extra addition. Thereby, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of the special figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time is extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares an outlier design command of the decoration special drawing 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special drawing 1 command area (A5418), and executes effect command setting processing ( A5419). Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 1 in-process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2, the processing number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area,
Toku-zu 1 The process of stopping the variable display game as a result of losing is executed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the result of deviation of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of processing during display of special map 1 (end of special display 1 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is in execution (during change of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be forced with a loss result. Will be changed (end of execution).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 2 game processing timer has repeated 0 times and the special figure 2 game processing timer is up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended in variation (end of execution) when the special result 2 variable display game in which the hit result changes.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 2 command from the decoration special drawing 2 command area, and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) is special figure 2 It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the upper limit of the number of rounds from the aforementioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5425).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1 for setting to execute the special figure 2 displaying process is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended. In the special figure 2 display processing shift setting process 1, the process number "2" is displayed in the special figure 2 game process number area.
Is performed, processing for stopping the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and other processing necessary for shifting to the processing during display of special figure 2 is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during change of special figure 1).
Even if the special figure 2 variable display game has a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the result of the miss.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first, from the big hit flag 1 area, big hit flag 1 (big hit information,
Alternatively, the deviation information is shown) (A5701), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (A5702). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5703).

The game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A5703)
The result is "Y"), and the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the signal per special symbol 1.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes an effect command setting process (A57).
06). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a big hit fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5707), and production command setting processing is executed (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5709). The signals here include on-data of two signals for big hits (on signals) and on-data of three signals for big hits (on signals). In the present embodiment, it does not matter because there is no 2R jackpot, but the 2 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the low probability, and the 3 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the high probability. You may.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5710), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the process number in order to shift to the process in the fanfare / interval (A5712), saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5713), and performs the fanfare. / Execute the processing transition setting processing during the interval (
(A5714), and the process of displaying the special map 1 ends.

In the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing, processing for shifting to fanfare / interval processing is executed. Specifically, as the signal for starting the big hit, one big hit signal of ON data (ON signal) and four big hit signals of ON data (ON signal) are saved in the external information output data area. In addition, a signal relating to the end of high probability and time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time-reduction variation number area that holds the time-reduction variation number is cleared. In addition, the round number area is cleared to zero.

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is “N”), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is If it is out, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when the falling lottery (FIG. 20) is won. If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the time-reduction final variation (A5716). The time reduction final variation is a final (eg, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time saving state. If it is not the final fluctuation of the time reduction (the result of A5716 is “N”),
The process moves to step A5724.

The gaming control device 100, when the high probability final fluctuation (the result of A5715 is “Y”) or the time shortening final fluctuation (the result of A5716 is “Y”), the probability information command indicating the low probability (low). Probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5718). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5719), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720).
After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5721). Toku-zu 2 If the variation display game is in the small hit state (the result of A5721 is "Y"), step A5
The processing shifts to the processing of 724.

When the special control 2 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5721 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5).
722). Then, the second game state display section 56 (lamp D8) for informing that it is right-handed
In order to turn off -D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5723), and the change in special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5).
724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 1 normal process to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, and the special figure 1 game process number area is displayed. The processing number is saved (A5725). Then, the process of displaying the special map 1 ends.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 2. FIG. 38A shows the first half of the processing during the display of special figure 2, and FIG. 38B shows the latter half of the processing during the display of special figure 2.

The game control device 100, first, from the small hit flag 2 area, small hit flag 2 (small hit information,
Alternatively, the deviation information) is loaded (A5801) and the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5802). Then, from the big hit flag 2 area, the big hit flag 2 (big hit information, or
(Indicating deviance information) is loaded (A5803), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5).
804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 (A5805).
The result is "Y"), and the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the special symbol 2 signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes an effect command setting process (A58).
08). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Then, the big hit fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5809), and production command setting processing is executed (A5810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5811). The signal here includes 2 pieces of ON data for big hits and 3 pieces of ON data for big hits. In the present embodiment, it does not matter because there is no 2R jackpot, but the 2 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the low probability, and the 3 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the high probability. You may.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5812), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5
815), and executes the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (A5816),
The special figure 2 displaying process is terminated. The fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 displaying processing.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (A5
The result of 805 is "N"), and it is determined based on the small hit flag 2 whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) ( A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final change (A5818). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5818 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-reducing final variation (A5819). When it is not the final time shortening change (result of A5819 is “N”), the process of steps A5820 to A5823 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A5824.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (result of A5818 is “Y”) or a time-reducing final variation (result of A5819 is “Y”). )), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power outage recovery of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left hitting instruction notification flag (A58).
23). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5824), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5825). In addition,
Because the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the small hit, this hit design command corresponds to the small hit design.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes an effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D) that saves the signal (on data of the launch position designation signal 1) related to the right-handing instruction in the test signal output data area (A5828) and notifies that it is the right-handing time.
In order to light 8-D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in the game control device 100, in the present embodiment, the lower major winning opening is opened by a small hit,
Clear the lower prize hole fraudulent prize number area (A5830), save the flag outside fraudulent monitoring period in the lower prize hole fraud monitoring period flag area (A5831), and execute the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process Then, (A5832), the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. Although the big winning opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 may not be changed.

In the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, processing for shifting to special figure 2 small hitting fanfare middle processing is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the process number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare processing, and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area. Also, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Furthermore, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 small hit (on data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit midway information is saved in the special figure status area.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5833). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5833 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the time-reduction final variation (A5834). If it is not the final time reduction change (result of A5834 is “N”), the process of steps A5835 to A5839 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A5840.

The gaming control device 100, if it is a high-probability final variation (result of A5833 is “Y”), or if it is a time shortening final variation (result of A5834 is “Y”), the probability information command (
(Low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5836). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5837), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Then, the game control device 100 notifies the second game state display unit 5 that it is right hitting.
In order to turn off 6 (lamps D8-D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5839), and the change in special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction). (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 2 normal processing to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing, and the special figure 1
The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (A5841). Then, the special figure 2 displaying process is ended.

[Processing during fanfare / interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (result of A6001 is “N”), the fanfare / interval processing is ended.
When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first big hit round (A600
The result of 2 is "N"), and the process proceeds to step A6010.

If the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y
)), It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball has not passed through the universal starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is ended. That is, the right-hand strike is started and the universal figure starting gate 34
Until the game ball passes, the process related to the big hit (such as the process of opening the special winning opening) does not proceed.

The game control device 100, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 (A600
When the result of No. 3 is “Y”), that is, when the right hit is started, the setting of the information on the start of the big hit is executed (A6004-A6009). First, set the round number upper limit value table (
A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A6005). In this embodiment, the upper limit number of rounds is 10R and 4R.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table and saves it in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in the present embodiment, since the upper special winning opening is opened in the big hit, the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A6007), and R
Save the flag outside fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the WM's upper prize hole (A600
8), ON output data of the signal indicating that the accessory continuously operating device is operating is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A601).
0). The number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area is cleared to 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time because it is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing.
After that, a big command opening information and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big winning medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the big winning medium processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, 0 is set as the initial value in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed during one round, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern that repeats opening and closing, the initial value is not necessarily 0, but may be a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is,
Start with the value in the middle). Next, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A60).
16). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the big hit round 1 (first big hit round).

In the case of the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017). Here, the lever solenoid is opened so as to open the specific region 86 in a long time in the case of the probability variation big hit (10R or the 4R probability variation big hit) and in a short time (a very short time) in the case of the normal big hit (10R normal big hit). The operation data of 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to zero. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “N”), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 shifts to the process of opening the special winning opening as the process number.
4 ”is set (A6019), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (
A6020). Special Figure 1 When it is a big hit in the variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y")
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6022). Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6020 is "N"), save this processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and set the special winning opening time to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the special winning opening solenoid of the RWM. In the data area, the special winning opening solenoid 39b (special winning opening solenoid 2) is turned on, the upper special winning opening on data is saved (A6026), the special winning opening count is cleared (A6027), and the fanfare / interval processing is performed. To finish.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there is only a big hit that opens only the upper special winning opening, but it is possible to provide two types of big hits that open only the upper special winning opening and big hits that open only the lower special winning opening,
It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower winning holes.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction determination data is data without time saving, the big hit end setting process 1 is executed to shift to the normal game state after the big hit ends (A6102), and when the time reduction determination data is data with time saving, a big hit After the end, big hit end setting processing 2 is executed to shift to the time saving state (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round) in the case of the probability variation big hit (10R or 4R probability variation big hit), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. It almost certainly detects the passage of the game ball to V 86 (V winning) (regular region regular passage). Then, when there is a detection signal from the specific area switch 72, the game control device 100 sends the specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) to the specific area 86 to RA.
It can be stored in M.

In addition, even in the big hit round 1 in the case of the normal big hit (10R normal big hit), the specific area 86
Although it is opened only for a very short time, the specific area switch 72 may sometimes detect an accidental passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (specific area irregular passing).
Also in this case, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

The game control device 100, when there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is “N”)
, And proceeds to the processing of step A6106. On the other hand, if there is specific area passage information (A61
When the result of 04 is "Y"), the big hit end setting process 3 is executed in order to shift to the probability change state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit (A6105). In this case, the data set in the big hit end setting process 3 is overwritten on the data set in the big hit end setting process 1 and 2, and the data set in the big hit end setting process 1 and 2 becomes invalid. Become.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A6106). In the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low probability or high probability probability state or a time saving state is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a specific area irregular passage (A6107). As described above, the specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage) is
In the case of a normal big hit, the game ball passes through the specific area 86, and the specific area regular passage (specific area normal passage) means that the game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a probability variation big hit. .. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area irregular passage has occurred. In addition to the regular passage of the specific region, even when the irregular passage of the specific region occurs, the state changes to the probability variation state (probability variation state) after the big hit ends.

When there is a specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is “Y”), the game control device 100 adds and includes irregular probability variation information in the loaded probability information command (A6108). A performance command setting process is executed to set the command as a performance command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is “N”), effect command setting processing is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as it is as an effect command (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as a process number to return to the normal process of special figure 1 (A6110), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6111).
. Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (A611).
2). The signals relating to the end of the big hit here are off data of one big hit signal and off data of three big hits.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signal regarding the end of the big hit here, for example, the OFF data of the condition device operating signal, the OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the OFF data of the special symbol 1 signal, the OFF data of the special symbol 2 signal Is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (A6115), and the special figure status region is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 jackpot end process is ended.

This special figure 2 game wait time value is used for the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game that has been forcibly terminated (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and for the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to delay sometimes. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the interrupt period (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game processing (immediately after the current special figure 1 game processing (A1313 in FIG. 7) in which the special figure 1 big hit end processing is executed ( In A1314) of FIG. 7, the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game starts (started within the timer interrupt processing this time). It will start first and may be a problem. Note that the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit ending process, and therefore remains 0. Therefore, regarding the determination of the fluctuation start of the special display 1 variable display game, the next timer interrupt process (special FIG. 1
It is performed in special figure 1 normal processing during game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) that is twice the interrupt period, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interruption processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further-
The value is updated to 1 (decreased by 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), and it is determined whether the variation of the special figure 2 variable display game is started (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing). .. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state by the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a deviating symbol (forced termination or originally unchanged).

After the end of the big hit state, if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A6717 is omitted, and FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

Steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 big hit ending process are the special figure 1 big hit end processing in which steps "A6101" to "A6116" of the special figure 1 big hit ending process are replaced with "special figure 2", respectively. Since the same processing as the processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the special figure 2 big hit end processing, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain at 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is started. If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied after the determination (in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. This is because it can be done.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the big hit end setting process 1 (A6102, A62) in the special figure 1, 2 big hit end process
02) will be described in detail. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of no time saving state (no time saving) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal related to the start without the time saving condition is the off-data of the two big hit signals. The signal related to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signal regarding the start without the time saving state is off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, special symbol 2 variation It is the off-data of the time shortening state signal, the off-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the off-data of the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303) and saves the universal time saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (A6).
304), save the special map low probability & no time saving flag in the special map game mode flag area (A
6305). The general / universal work time saving flag indicates that the general / universal work variation display game is not in the time-reducing variable state (time-saving state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and not in a time saving state (universal power support state).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction fluctuation number region to 0 (A6306),
A signal related to a left-handed instruction (for example, off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). Then, in order to turn off the indicator LED (first gaming state display portion 57) being hit to the right, save the number being hit to the left in the gaming state display number 2 area (A6308), and to the transmission command area at power failure recovery. The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end processing, big hit end setting processing 2 (A6103, A62)
03) will be described in detail. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time saving is the ON data of two big hit signals. The ON data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area when the fanfare of the big hit is started (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the inside of the big hit to the external information terminal 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the time saving state (with time saving) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is OFF data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, OFF data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, ON data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation It is the on-data of the time shortening state signal, the on-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the on-data of the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time saving state in the game state display number area (A6503), and saves the flag indicating that there is a time saving state in the universal figure game mode flag area (A
6504), save the special map low probability & time saving flag in the special map game mode flag area (
A6505). The general / universal time saving flag indicates that the general / universal variable display game is in a time shortening variable state (time saving state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and is in a time saving state (universal power support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction variation number area that stores the time reduction variation number (A6506), and indicates the probability of being in the time reduction state in the power failure recovery transmission command area. The information command (time saving) is saved (A6507), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends.

Since the right hitting state is advantageous in that the right hitting is advantageous from the big hitting state, the right hitting setting is not performed in the big hitting end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end processing, big hit end setting processing 3 (A6105, A62)
The details of (05) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time saving is the ON data of two big hit signals. The ON data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area when the fanfare of the big hit is started (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the inside of the big hit to the external information terminal 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signal regarding the start of the high probability & time saving, special symbol 1 high probability state signal on data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal on data, special symbol 2 is ON data of the variation time shortening state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is high and is in a short time state (here, a time reduction change of the special figure change display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the right-handing instruction (for example, ON data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to turn on the indicator LED (first gaming state display portion 57) in the right-handed state, save the number in the right-handed state in the gaming state display number 2 area (A6806), and in the transmission command area at power failure recovery A probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is ended.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during the small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hitting opening command for opening the lower special winning opening as an effect command (A6901) and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). next,
"8" is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small win opening time (for example, 1600) is set as the opening time of the lower special winning opening.
msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal (start data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) related to the start of the small hit operation in the test signal output data area (A6906), and in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the lower big prize winning on data (A6907). As a result, in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened.

Next, the game control device 100, the special winning opening count switch (lower special winning opening switch 38
a and / or the special winning opening switch 39a) clears the special winning area count area (counting number of detections) (A6908), and ends the small hit fanfare processing.

In the present embodiment, only the small hit opening pattern in which the special winning opening opens only once, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated. Also, as the processing number, "8
By setting ", it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number in order to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (
(A7301), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7302). Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7303), save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area Yes (A7304). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of a big hit is in a low probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without universal communication support), that is, low probability of special figure & no time saving (normal) It is determined whether or not it is in the gaming state (A7307). When it is not in the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (result of A7307 is "N"), the processing of step A7310 and thereafter is executed.

When the game control device 100 is in the special figure low probability & no time saving (in the normal game state) (A
The result of 7307 is "Y"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), and the number in the left-handed state is displayed in the game state display number 2 area. Is saved (A7309), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (A7310).

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A7310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311), and executes effect command setting processing. Yes (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decoration special figure 1 variable display game. After that, special figure 1
The game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of A7310 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared without preparing the decorative special figure 1 restart command (A7313),
Special figure 2 end the small hit end processing

For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit ending process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process (main program) executed by effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B ***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (
B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B
0003) and permit interrupts (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0.
008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002), and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 uses the RTC (real time clock) 3 as a time measuring means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Moreover, when the power supply to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power supply to the game machine 10 is turned on), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). Between B and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. The time timer may be adjusted to the time of the RTC 338 when the information is read. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time instead of RTC 338 to execute various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from the time interval by randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn such that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period of executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be selected so that the larger the set value, the larger the selection rate.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). continue,
A hall / player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changes in the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals by a person in charge of the game hall (game shop) or a player (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by lottery the value to be added to the effect points (added value) with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the setting value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as effect random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including LEDs or the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (a panel performance device 44, a frame performance device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect for driving a motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0021 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103
), The contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B11).
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The received command buffer stores the received command to 32
It is configured to store up to individual items. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), The processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines that the result of B1106 is "Y" when the copying is completed.
]), The received command content in the analysis command area is loaded (B1107), and a received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. In addition, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 48) described above will be described below with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 shows the production control device 30.
6 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a received command analysis process executed by 0.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is a MODE section (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are M
The ODE section and the ACTION section are arranged in this order.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part is within the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203
Result of "Y"), and further, the ACTION part for the MODE part determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that the command of the type specified by the MODE section can take. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process). And MODE
If the part represents a variable system command (result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a variable command (B12
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the hit command (B
1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an action (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to a performance during a hit, and includes, for example, a big hit fanfare command (set in special figure display processing), a round command (fanfare / Set during interval processing), Interval command (set during big winning opening processing), Ending command (set during big winning opening processing), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small hit round command), It is a small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) or the like. When the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the hit system command (B12
The result of 07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (B).
1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special drawing 1 command and a decoration special drawing 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol type command (
The result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing ends.

Production control device 300, in the case where the MODE part does not represent a symbol type command (B12
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE part is within the range of the single-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a single-shot system command (B12
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (B1213). The read-ahead symbol system command includes a read-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part indicates the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended. If the jackpot probability when received is a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) is used to execute the look-ahead symbol system command processing, and if the jackpot probability when received is a high probability state, the look-ahead The look-ahead symbol-based command processing may be executed using the stop symbol command (low probability).

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (B1215). The look-ahead variation system command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, when the MODE part indicates a prefetch change type command (the result of B1215 is "
Y ”), the prefetching variable system command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. When the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or the AC for the MODE part
Even when the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is ended.

[Single-shot command processing]
Details of the single-shot command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B
1302) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (B1
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE part represents a command for RAM initialization, (
When the result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the one-shot system command process ends.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). When the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (B13
The result of 05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a power failure recovery command (B1
The result of 305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). When the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B130
The result of 7 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 reserved number command (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310),
Terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B131).
2) The single command processing is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process ends.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (B1
The result of 313 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents an error / illegal command (B1315). The error / illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state-on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

When the MODE part indicates an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (
(B1316), terminates the single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent an error / illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 next causes the MODE section to execute a command for production mode switching (special figure display processing). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the command for mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), the production control device 300 next indicates whether the MODE part represents an out ball number command indicating the out ball number. It is determined whether or not (B1319). If the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1).
320) and terminates the single command processing.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (B
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a count command (special winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE section indicates the command for counting the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether the MODE part represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is step A in FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command at the time of power recovery from 1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. If the MODE part represents the setting value information command (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception process is executed (B1324), and the one-shot system command process ends. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the set value information command (B
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a command for setting change, for example, a command (A
1030). When the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (B13
The result of No. 25 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for changing the probability setting is received, the setting change system information setting process displays a setting change display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed on the display device 41.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the command of the setting change system (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As a command for setting confirmation, for example, a command (
A1033). If the MODE part indicates a command for setting confirmation, (B1
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability setting is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for informing the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The command to stop the symbols includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and the symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). And MODE
When the part represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 3
00 then determines whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B13).
30).

When the MODE part command is a normal command (result of B1330 is “Y”)
The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols stop (B1332), and ends the single shot system command process. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is set to a "changing", "big hit" or "small hit" flag depending on the timing at which this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N
)), Or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (the result of B1330 is “N”)
In effect, the effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, the MODE part is a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (A5
413) or a decoration special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the effect control device 300
May execute a process of interrupting or restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the prefetch symbol type command processing (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 51 shows the production control device 30.
It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading symbol type command processing performed by 0.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information on special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Production control device 300, after step B1602 and B1603, sets the prefetching variable system command reception waiting flag which shows that it is waiting to receive the prefetching variable system command (B160).
4). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the prefetching variable command processing (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 52 shows the effect control device 30.
9 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetching variable system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variable system command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command process is ended. When waiting for the reception of a prefetching variable command (the result of B1701 is "
Y ”), and clears the readahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board), the design of the latest pending information (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2)
Of the pre-reading variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of (B1703), and the in-sub pre-reading variable command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part of the pre-reading variable system command (
B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-look-ahead variation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is set.
The copy is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the intra-sub prefetch change command MODE part and the ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707).
. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
If both CT parts are other than 0 (result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B170
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).
).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold display starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half fluctuation is long, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half fluctuation is short. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation type command is converted into the sub-internal prefetching variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated in the same manner.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub prefetch change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system,
If the ACT part (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command is not converted, the effect control device 30
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach,
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach + 1 stop deviation.
Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or , If the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (B171
If the result of 0 is “N”), it is determined that the converted command is abnormal, and the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal, the effect control device 300 (B
The result of 1710 is "Y"), the pending information of the prefetch target (latest pending information) is loaded from the prefetch variable command area (B1711), and the prefetch lottery process related to the prefetch effect of the latest pending is executed (B1712). Examples of the prefetching effect include continuous notice effect (including chance eye prefetching effect), prefetch zone effect, and pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest pending lookahead effect is generated (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected lookahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (such as a pending change notice) is an effect to be started immediately (B1715). When the prefetching effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1716). When the prefetching effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (B1715)
Is "N"), the display corresponding to the prefetch effect at the time of the hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the hold number is decreased) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the read-ahead variable system command processing ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending prefetch effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is “N”), or when the prefetch effect that occurs is not an immediate start effect (B171).
The result of 5 is "N"), as it is. The prefetching variable system command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 receives the received symbol-based command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of (command) is set (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. And the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to the outlying symbol or the 10R certainty variation jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 28, the 4R certainty variation jackpot symbol, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

Production control device 300, the special figure type (special figure 1
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. If the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (result of B1903 is "Y")
, The variable command processing ends.

Rendering control device 300, when the variation system command and the symbol type is not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect which is the effect during change is executed (B19).
05). It should be noted that there are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is set to change in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. Yes (B1907
).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 54) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is variation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the number of production points, model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and support the MODE part of variable system commands (variable command) and the number of pending special figure types Acquire the address of the first half notice distribution group table (B200
3). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the reachable variation, the production control device 300, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type To obtain the address (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. Next, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of effect points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, symbol type, and setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2007), and the variation system command The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT unit is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the variation time and main reach contents can be known from the variation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the announcement lottery (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). Then, for example, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2013). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of setting suggestion effect (B2014). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is set (B2015), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (B20).
16). Next, display setting of hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special map type is performed, and, for example, a display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special map that changes this time is reduced is set, and the look-ahead effect during the hold shift is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read (B2017). Then, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set not only based on the contents of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can change the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED) from the game machine 10
You can enjoy guessing the setting value (probability setting value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B
2019), in addition to the first to third special symbols, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2020). In addition, the fourth symbol variation, the display device 41
Other than the above, the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 and / or
It is displayed on the display device 41.

[Winning command processing]
Details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the big hit fanfare command or the small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, the fanfare is set to the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (
(B2103), the hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit of the number of rounds can be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part indicates a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the round command or the small hit opening command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to “in round” (B2105, B21).
06), the hit command processing ends.

When the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
If the result is “Y”), that is, if the hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10. The interval is set to the status flag (B2108, B2109), and the hit command processing is ended. There is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once in the small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

When the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the interval (B2107
The result is “N”), and the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending (B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (B21
If the result of 10 is “Y”), that is, if the hit command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current effect is set. The ending state is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not indicate the ending (B2
When the result of 110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the hit command processing without executing any processing.

The setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 66.

[Time chart of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period in association with the special figure variation display game. As a specific example, the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 3
When a game ball wins in 7, the special map variation display game is started, and the first setting suggestion effect (setting notification effect) is performed before the normal reach (first reach) occurs, and after the normal reach,
A case will be described in which the second setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach has been generated (may not be generated) and before the special figure variation display game is ended. Note that the plurality of times may be three times or more instead of two times.

The setting suggestion effect is, for example, when displaying the variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4), for example, character A, character B, and character C (characters having shapes, colors, and patterns that are distinguishable from each other). It is an effect that is displayed, and the probability setting value currently set can be suggested by the number of displayed images, and it is generated at a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in the present embodiment). The setting suggestion effect is also generated at a timing other than the variable display game (for example, when the out-of-ball error is released).

Character A suggests, for example, what is called an odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is
The probability setting values (1 to 6) are suggested (notified) to be any of odd probability setting values (1, 3, 5). The internal probability setting value 1 stored in the probability setting value area
6 to 6 respectively correspond to the settings 1 to 6.

Character B suggests, for example, so-called even setting, and the probability setting value currently set is
The probability setting values (1 to 6) are suggested (notified) to be any of the even probability setting values (2, 4, 6).

Character C suggests, for example, that the probability setting value currently set is one of the high setting (probability setting values (5, 6)) of the probability setting values (1 to 6) (notification). To do.

In the first setting suggestion effect, one to three characters A, B, and C are displayed. In the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters each of character A, character B, and character C are displayed, but it is easy to select 4 to 10 characters. For example, which character is used to make the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by making the difference in the display numbers of the character A, the character B, and the character C more noticeable than in the first time. You may be able to judge.

[Reliability of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect by the character (character) can be set by the number of characters A, B, and C. The reliability corresponding to the number of characters can be set by randomly selecting the number of characters with a winning probability according to the setting. When the lottery is performed by allocating to each number, the winning probability is a allocating rate (selection rate). In the case where the respective numbers are not sorted but drawn independently, the winnings may be repeated (for example, 4 and 7), but in that case, either one of the winnings is selected.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be performed only by the character having the largest number of the characters A, B, and C (the number of characters having the largest number may be randomly drawn regardless of the setting so as not to suggest the setting). To).

As described above, in the first setting suggesting effect, one to three characters A, B, and C are displayed. Therefore, when the number of each of the characters A to C is one, two, and three, each is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting.

As described above, in the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters of each of character A, character B, and character C are displayed. Therefore, the number of each of characters A to C is 1, 2, 3, Four,
The cases of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 are respectively drawn by a winning probability according to the setting. Since it is easy to select 4 to 10 wins, the winning probability of 4 to 10 wins is 1
~ Significantly larger than 3 winning probabilities (extremely 1 to 3 winning probabilities are set to zero)
.

As shown in FIG. 58, the reliability is set to increase by 10% each time the number of displayed characters A, B, and C increases by 1, and when 10 are displayed, the reliability is set to 100%. can do. For example, one, two, and three characters C appear evenly in any setting, and the reliability of setting suggestion of high setting is low.

It is also possible to multiply the reliability shown in FIG. 58 by the ratio of the total number of displayed characters and the number of displayed characters with the largest number of displayed characters.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable display game. For example, it is set that the specific character increases in the first time and the second time, and the second time is set. In suggestive performance, the amount of increase of a specific character (not the number of characters)
The reliability of the setting suggestion may be reported. For example, the setting suggestion by the character having the largest increase amount may be set as the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the increase amount. It is possible.

Note that the setting suggestive effect setting is performed in step B2012 and step B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55) as described above.

[Expectation of big hit]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the big hit performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the present embodiment, when the setting suggestion effect occurs, the expectation degree of the “big hit” is set high, and when it does not occur, it is set low. FIG. 59 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

When the “big hit” occurs, the ratio of the “big hit” occurring after the setting suggestion effect is set to 80%, and the ratio of the “big hit” occurring without the setting suggestion effect is assigned to 20%.

On the other hand, when "disappearance" occurs, the ratio of "disappearance" occurring after the setting suggestion effect is set to 1%, and the ratio of "disappearance" occurring without setting suggestion effect is set to 99%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a "big hit" will occur thereafter, and even if there is no setting suggestion effect, the "big hit" occurs and the player Can give a surprise to.

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), setting suggestion is performed by changing the first mode (for example, number, color) of the character appearing in the setting suggestion effect, and the jackpot is achieved in the second mode (for example, size) of the character. It is also possible to inform the degree of expectation. As described above, the effect control device 300 (the game control device 100) is selected by the character having the largest display number among the characters A, B, and C.
), It is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect. If any of the characters A, B, and C has a color different from that of the other characters, the suggestion of setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is made by the character having the different color. It is also possible to direct.

When a “big hit” occurs, the ratio of the “big hit” occurring after the setting suggestion effect displayed by the large character is 50%, and the “big hit” is indicated after the setting suggestion effect displayed by the character smaller than the large character. The ratio of occurrence of "big hit" is set to 30%, and the ratio of occurrence of "big hit" without setting suggestion effect is set to 20%.

On the contrary, in the case where “out” occurs, the rate of occurrence of “out” after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 1%, and after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate of occurrence of "disappearance" is set to 1%, and the rate of occurrence of "disappearance" without setting suggestion effect is set to 98%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a "big hit" will occur thereafter, and by performing the setting suggestion effect with a character having a particularly large display, the expectation feeling can be obtained. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the decorative special figure variable display game in which the variable display progresses to the SP reach through the normal reach is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed before normal reach (first time) and when SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

(A1) of FIG. 60 is a display screen when the decorative special figure variable display game is started. The variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610) is displayed in the center of the display device 41.
B) is arranged, and decoration stop symbols “6, 1, 2” are displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, the variable display area 615 is arranged in the lower right corner of the display device 41, and the variable display area 6 is
At 15, stop symbols “6, 1, 2” are displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number "3" and the special figure 2 reserved number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number are respectively displayed. The number "0" indicating the number is displayed.

In the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start-up memory as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold in the hold digesting area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the display unit 630a moves. At the present time, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display section 630b that displays the second start memory as the second hold display (second start memory display).

After that, in (A2), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decoration special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓) of the ornament reduced symbol (small symbol) as the identification information.
↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are changing, respectively. In addition, a pending pending display 633 a indicating a pending state of the running special figure variation display game (starting memory that was the right to execute this special figure variation display game) is displayed in the pending digest area 640. Further, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. ing.

At this time, as the first setting suggestion effect, the character A (bear) is displayed on the display device 41.
, Character B (frog), and character C (tiger) are respectively displayed. In (A2), two character A, two character B, and one character C are displayed.
The reliability of the setting suggestion of the character B is 20%, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character B is 20%, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C is 10%, and which character is used for the effect control device 300 (the game control device 1).
It is not clear if (00) is making the intended setting suggestion.

However, for a player who knows that setting suggestion production is performed multiple times, it is possible to predict that a highly reliable setting suggestion will be performed in the next setting suggestion production, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way. Even in the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

The display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image in which the facial expression and display position of each character move.

Next, in (A3), the reach state (normal reach) is entered, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and the first setting suggestion effect is finished. Although the display of each character is erased in (A3), the display may be continued as it is. At this time, the character display 755
“Reach” is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (A4), the reach develops from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, the movie effect (moving image effect) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left symbol and the right symbol are in the upper corners of the screen. Moving. At this time, the display of the character display 755a "reach" may be made to disappear.

In addition, with the transition to SP3 reach, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Here, for example, character A, character B, and character C are displayed around the movie effect (moving image effect), and more than the first set suggestion effect is displayed. In (A4), three character A, four character B, and five character C are displayed. Note that, here, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion is made based on the number (5) of the characters C having the largest display number, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C (the probability setting value is either 5 or 6) is 50%. Can be displayed (set) as.

In addition, the number of characters C having the largest number of displayed characters (5) and the total number of displayed characters (3 + 4 +
5 = 12), the reliability of the character C setting suggestion is (5/12) × 50% = 20.
． It can also be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by the character C is higher, in the setting suggestion effect of the second time, the lottery may be performed so as to reduce the display number of the character A or the character B from the first time. ..

Further, one character C is displayed at the first time, five characters are displayed at the second time, and the display number is increased by four. Therefore, for example, the reliability of each character can be increased to 10%, and the reliability of the second setting suggestion of the character C can be set to 4 × 10% of the increased amount (regardless of the number).

After that, in (A5), the special figure variation display game ends and the setting suggestion effect also ends, and the big hit decoration stop design "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610, and the big hit stop design "3". , 3, 3 ”is displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, the character display 755b "Big hit !!" is displayed below the decorative stop design. Further, at this time, the changing pending display 633a displayed in the pending digest area 640 disappears, and it can be confirmed that one pending is completely consumed.

Then, in (A6), the big hit round game starts, and the big hit state (special game state)
At the same time, the big hit round production will start. In the setting suggesting effect (first and / or second time), by displaying the characters A, B, and C in a larger size than that shown in FIG. 60, the expectation of a big hit is further increased. You may make it notify (set).

[Time chart of setting suggestive effect (first modified example)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modified example of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modified example, a pseudo continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of times (three times) of pseudo fluctuation is executed before the normal reach occurs, the first setting suggestive effect occurs during the second pseudo fluctuation, and the second time The setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo variation. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations may be determined in step B2010 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 55), for example. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated and temporarily fluctuated a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variable display game.

Character A (red) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called odd number setting, and for example, the currently set probability setting value is an odd probability setting value (1, 3) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 5).

Character B (blue) (FIG. 62A) suggests so-called even setting, and for example, the currently set probability setting value is an even probability setting value (2, 4) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 6).

Character C (yellow) (FIG. 62A) has the currently set probability setting value set to a high setting (one of the probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests that there is.

In the first modified example, a group effect is performed in which a character group is formed and displayed by a plurality of characters. In the character group, the total number of characters A (red) and characters B (blue) is constant (or
Almost constant), and the reliability of setting suggestion that the probability setting value is an even number or an odd number is notified according to the ratio. In the character group, the reliability of setting suggestion that the probability setting value is the high setting "5, 6" is further notified by the number of characters C (yellow). The characters A and B may have the same shape only by changing the color.

Since character A (red) and character B (blue) indicate odd setting and even setting, which are repulsion events, the total number is kept constant and the ratio of character A (red) and character B (blue) is set. The reliability of setting suggestion can be reported.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is set to 7
: 3, and in the second setting suggestion effect, by setting the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) to 9: 1, the reliability of the suggestion of odd settings with odd probability setting values You can increase the degree. For example, when the ratio is 7: 3, the odd number setting has a reliability of 70% (the even setting has a reliability of 3).
0%), and with a ratio of 9: 1, the odd setting has a reliability of 90% (the even setting has a reliability of 10%).
).

On the contrary, in the first setting suggesting effect, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is set to 3: 7, and in the second setting suggesting effect, the character A (red): character B is set. By setting the ratio of the number of (blue) to 1: 9, it is possible to increase the reliability of setting suggestion for even-numbered settings with probability setting values that are even. For example, in the ratio 3: 7, the reliability of the even setting is 70% (the reliability of the odd setting is 30%), and in the ratio 1: 9, the reliability of the even setting is 90% (the reliability of the odd setting is 10%).

Further, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the display number of the character C (yellow) is set to 5, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the number of the character C (yellow) is increased to 7, thereby increasing the probability. It is also possible to increase the reliability of setting suggestion that the set value is a high setting.

In the first modified example, in the first setting suggesting effect, when the character C (or the character A or the character B may be displayed), or when none of the character A, the character B, or the character C is displayed, the big hit The degree of expectation can be set as low. Further, when all of the characters A, B, and C are displayed, it is possible to set them as having a high expectation of a big hit.

It is also possible to set so that the expectation of the big hit changes based on the change in the displayed size and color of the characters A, B, and C. In this way, when the character performing the setting suggesting effect shows that the expectation of the big hit is high, it may be performed together with the display mode change indicating that the expectation of the big hit is high in the changing pending display 633a of the holding digestion area 640. The display mode change may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen transition diagram (first modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modified example of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the first modified example of the setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

(B1) of FIG. 62A is the same as (A1) of FIG. (B2) of FIG. 62A corresponds to FIG.
Although it is the same as (A2) of 0, the variable display displayed in the variable display area 610 is the first pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect.

Then, in (B3), the first pattern of the pseudo continuous effect (single effect) ends and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol that suggests the pseudo continuous effect. Is stopped. Also, the number of executions of pseudo fluctuations that will be started from now (number of pseudo repetitions)
A character display 752 “Pseudo twice” is displayed.

After that, in (B4), the second pseudo variation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (
Group production) is performed. For example, as shown in (B4), character A (star type star), character B (
An image of a meteor shower consisting of a star star ☆ and a character C (triangle Δ) flowing from right to left on the screen for a predetermined time. Then, it is possible to notify that the expectation of the big hit is high by the flow of the video.

At this time, for example, the ratio of the number of displayed characters A (red) and the number of displayed characters B (blue) is
It is 7: 3, and it is informed that the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting is slightly high.
Further, since the character C (yellow) is also displayed, the display of this character C (yellow) makes it possible to suggest setting with a predetermined reliability (which may be good in FIG. 58). Note that the character display 752 “pseudo twice” may remain displayed or may be erased while the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is being performed.

Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. Further, in (B5), the character display 752 “pseudo twice” may remain displayed or may be erased.
The second pseudo variation continues in the variation display area 610.

Then, in (B6), the second variation ends and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol indicating the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed. In addition, at the same time, a character display 7 indicating the number of executions of the pseudo variation (pseudo consecutive number) to be started.
52 "Pseudo 3 times" is displayed.

After that, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the pseudo variation of the third variation decoration special symbol (large symbol) (
↓↓↓) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined time.

After that, in (B8), the second setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. At this time, (B
Similar to 4), an image in which a meteor shower consisting of the characters A, B, and C flows from the right to the left of the screen for a predetermined time. However, this time, the ratio of the display number of the character A (red) and the display number of the character B (blue) is 9: 1, and the reliability of setting and suggesting that it is an odd number setting is higher.

Further, since the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is increased from 5 to 7, it is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased by the increased amount (see FIG. 58). 2 on the contrary
If the display number of character C (yellow) is not increasing or decreasing in the second setting suggestion effect, it may be notified that the reliability of setting suggestion by the display of character C (yellow) is not so high. it can.

Next, in (B9), the reach state is entered, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. In this case, since the pseudo continuous effect has ended, the middle area 61
Pseudo continuous symbols are not displayed in 0C. Further, the character display 755 “reach” is displayed in the variable display area 6
It is displayed under 10.

After that, in (B10), the special figure variation display game ends, and the stop symbols “3, 1, 3” of “out” are displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. Also, at this time,
The changing pending display 633a displayed in the pending digest area 640 disappears, and it can be confirmed that one pending is completely consumed.

[Time chart of setting suggestive effect (second modified example)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modified example of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the gaming machine 10, there may be a case where a character zone effect (for example, a notice effect using the entire display screen) is performed with a predetermined probability based on a winning prize with a high expectation of a big hit. It is possible to inform that the degree of expectation is high.

Therefore, in the second modification, a setting suggestion effect is performed with a predetermined probability when entering the character zone, and the fact that the setting suggestion effect appears to notify that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than when only the character zone occurs.

In addition, the character zone continues until the hold that triggered the entry of the character zone is exhausted, and during that time, the variable display game is played a plurality of times as the hold is exhausted. At this time, the setting suggestion effect is performed each time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time the game is repeated.

As described above, in the second modified example, the character zone effect is executed as a pre-reading effect (pre-reading zone effect) based on hold over a plurality of special figure variable display games, and the pre-reading variable system command process (FIG. 52). Not limited to this, the character zone production,
Predetermined timing (timing) such as when the expectation of the big hit of the special figure variation display game being executed is high
It may be generated by the above and is executed over a plurality of variable display games.
55) or the like.

In the second modified example, three holdings (holding 3, holding 3) are already stored in the first starting memory (which may be the second starting memory).
Consider a case where the hold 2 and the hold 1) are held, and the hold with a high expectation of a big hit (hold 0) is won, and the hold is exhausted in the order of hold 3, hold 2, hold 1, and hold 0.

When the hold 3 is consumed, the first setting suggestion effect is performed, when the hold 2 is consumed, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, and when the hold 1 is consumed, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, When the hold 0 is exhausted, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three character A that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, two character B that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, and probability setting value of high setting is displayed. Character C that suggests is not displayed (0 is displayed).

In the second setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, and three characters B that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed. One character C that suggests is displayed.

In the setting suggestion for the third time, for example, three character A suggesting setting of odd probability setting values are displayed, five character B suggesting setting of even probability setting values are displayed, and probability setting value of high setting is displayed. Four character Cs that suggest “” are displayed.

In the setting suggestion for the fourth time, for example, three character A that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, and probability setting value of high setting is displayed. Seven character C suggesting is displayed.

In this way, the number of characters displayed that suggests the setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is increased each time the number of special figure variation display games is increased. Fig. 63
Since the display number of character B has increased and is larger than that of character A, the reliability of setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even is higher than the reliability of setting suggestion that it is odd. I can judge.

In addition, since the number of characters C displayed is 0, 1, 4, and 7 as the number of times of the special figure variation display game increases, it is set to a high value depending on the display mode (increase amount) of characters C. It is also possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is high.

On the contrary, if the number of characters C displayed does not increase or decreases even if the number of special figure variation display games is repeated, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the character C is displayed is high due to the display mode (decrease amount). It is also possible to notify that it is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modification)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the second modified example of the setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the second modified example of the setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 64A (C1) is a display screen when the decorative special figure variable display game is started, and FIG.
A stop symbol is displayed similarly to 0 (A1). The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. ..

In (C1), the first hold display unit 630 that displays the first start memory as the first hold display.
In a, the hold display 633 (hold 3) moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display portion 630a moves to the hold exhaustion area 640 of the rectangular frame.

Here, the hold display 633 (hold 0) displayed on the first hold display unit 630a is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing setting suggestive effect. As a result, the hold display 633 (hold 0) changes the display such that the color and the like are different from those of the other hold and notifies that the degree of expectation is high, but the display mode may be omitted.

After that, in (C2), the same variable display as in (A3) of FIG. 60 is displayed, and the digestion of the hold 3 is started. At this time, the pending pending display 633 a indicating the pending (holding 3) related to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is “3”.

In addition, when starting to consume the hold 3, the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the character zone is entered, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 is changed.

In (C2), three character A (bear) are displayed, two character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

By the way, as described above, the hold display 633 (hold 0) is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing setting suggestive effect. Therefore, it is possible to rush into the character zone when the hold 0 is won (the stage before (C1)). However, when the hold 3 is consumed, the attention to the hold 3 can be increased by entering the character zone.

After that, in (C3), the first variable display game ends, the stop symbol “3,2,9” of “out” is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display When 633a also disappears, Pending 3 is already digested. At this time, character A, character B
However, by moving to a position that does not overlap the stop symbol “3, 2, 9” or being erased, the first setting suggestion effect is also ended.

Next, in (C4), the same variable display as in (C2) is displayed, and the holding 2 is started to be consumed. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending (holding 2) related to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is “2”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 2, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, three character A (bear) are displayed, three character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. One is displayed.

After that, in (C5), the second variable display game ends, the stop symbol “5, 7, 8” of “out” is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display When 633a also disappears, the hold 2 is already digested. At this time, character A, character B
The character C moves to a position that does not overlap the stop symbol “5, 7, 8” or is erased, and the second setting suggestion effect is also ended.

Next, in (C6), the same variable display as in (C2) and (C4) is displayed, and the digestion of the hold 1 is started. At this time, hold (hold 1) related to the special figure variation display game being executed
The pending change display 633a indicating “” is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. In addition, special figure 1
The special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the reservation number display unit 650 is “1”.

In addition, when the hold 1 digestion is started, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, three character A (bear) are displayed, five character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Four are displayed.

After that, in (C7), the third variable display game ends, the stop symbol “4,2,1” of “out” is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display When 633a also disappears, the hold 1 is already digested. At this time, character A, character B
, Character C moves to a position that does not overlap the stop symbol “4, 2, 1” or is erased, and the setting suggestion effect for the third time is also terminated.

Next, in (C8), the same variable display as in (C2), (C4), and (C6) is displayed, and the holding 0 is started to be consumed. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending state (holding 0) related to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number displayed by the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 is “0”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 0, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed, three character A (bear) is displayed, five character B (frog) is displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Seven are displayed.

After that, in (C9), the fourth variable display game ends, and the stop symbols “2, 6, 9” of “out” are displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display Since 633a also disappears, the hold 1 is already consumed, and the character zone is ended. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are deleted, so that the fourth setting suggestion effect is also ended.

[Other settings suggestive production]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, instead of the character, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 by the right hitting instruction display 620 of the hitting instruction display. In this case, the reliability of the high setting may increase as the number of right-handing instruction displays 620 increases.

Further, even during the special figure variation display game, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a timing when the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41. In the example of FIG. 65, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the special game state such as a big hit fanfare, the setting suggestion effect is executed by the right hitting instruction display 620. In this way, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a timing that is easily noticed by the player, so that the setting suggestion effect can be prevented from being overlooked. Further, at the time of a big hit fanfare, a display 621 "Aim at the gate !!" that suggests that a game ball is launched into the universal figure starting gate 34 by right-handing is also displayed.

When a distribution gate for selecting the maximum number of rounds for the big hit is provided in the game area 32 on the right side, the display 621 may indicate that the distribution gate is aimed instead of the universal figure starting gate 34. Since the big hit round does not start until the game ball passes through the sorting gate, it is possible to further prevent the setting suggestive effect from being overlooked.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestive effect. In the example of FIG. 66, an error that the player cannot intentionally wake up and must interrupt the game (here, a ball out error)
When the occurrence occurs, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easily noticed by the player.

During the decorative special figure variation display game started in (D1) of FIG. 66, as in (D2), an out-of-ball error occurs due to detection of a shoot-ball out switch signal, and an error display 623 “out-of-ball error” is displayed. To be done. The character 625 is displayed together with the error display 623, and the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625 informs the reliability of the high setting. After that, (D3
), The character 625 is displayed together with an error cancellation display 627 “Error is cleared” indicating that the error is canceled, and the display mode (expression) of the character 625 is displayed.
In the same manner, the high setting reliability is notified.

[Operation / Effect of First Embodiment]
Based on the above, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect related to the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed, and the stop result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine 10 that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when is a special result, a setting changing unit (setting key switch 93) that can change the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game , RAM initialization switch 112), the production control means (production control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion production that suggests information (probability set value) regarding the set value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.

With the above configuration, by performing the setting suggestion effect in relation to the variable display game or the like a plurality of times in a predetermined period (for example, a period of one variable display game or a period of a plurality of variable display games), the player is rendered. It is possible to focus on the game and to increase the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect multiple times in one variable display game.

With the above configuration, by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display games.

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect is performed in accordance with the timing of the effect such as the zone effect that is performed over the plurality of variable display games, so that the player can focus on the effect and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured so that the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestive effect executed later is higher than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestive effect executed first. , Set a setting suggestion effect multiple times.

With the above configuration, by setting the difference in the reliability of the setting suggestion depending on the timing,
The player enjoys watching the production and waiting for the production of the setting suggestion at a specific timing. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and to concentrate on the game by increasing the expectation for the setting suggestion effect that appears next.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be a special result by causing the setting suggestion effect to appear, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect Change the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestive effect.

With the above configuration, by associating the setting suggestive effect with the expectation of the special result (big hit), the player can pay attention to the effect even if the player is playing the game without worrying about the probability setting value. By associating the change of (1) with the reliability of the setting suggestion, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a plurality of images of the same type (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41 in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, so that a plurality of images can be displayed. The production modes of the setting suggestion productions of the times are associated with each other.

With the above configuration, by displaying the same type of character a plurality of times in the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effects that are performed a plurality of times are related to each other, and it is possible to grasp the setting suggestion by paying attention to it. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the production and to concentrate on the game.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In such a case, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initial) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. The production control means (production control device 300) is capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests information about a set value (probability set value), and the setting suggestion effect appears to cause a variable display. It is characterized in that it is possible to inform the degree of expectation that the game stop result will be a special result.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by performing the setting suggestion effect that is associated with the degree of expectation of the special result (big hit).

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41.

  With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can be performed in a simple and easy manner.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted. Second
The embodiment relates to a display probability set value in a setting variable state (setting change mode) and a display method thereof.

[Work setting value, display probability setting value, performance control information]
FIG. 67 is a set value for work and a set probability value for display of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (setting example 1,
It is a table showing a correspondence relationship between 2, 3, 4) and effect control information (effect setting value, effect setting value). Normally, the game control device 100 holds six work setting values “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” (setting values), and in response to this, probability setting values (information regarding setting values). There is a big hit probability (
And information corresponding to the small hit probability) “1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6”. However, depending on the gaming machine 10, a big hit probability (and a small hit probability) corresponding to different probability setting values
May be the same, and the number of types of display probability setting values may be set to a number smaller than six.
That is, in order to prevent confusion among hall-related persons, even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the game machine 10 are different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), big hit probability (and small hit probability). The display probability setting values associated with the hit probabilities are made the same. The same display probability setting value means the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

In the setting example 1 of FIG. 67, 1-6 is set as the display probability set value for the work set value 0-5, and the display probability set values are set to different values. In the setting example 2, all the display probability setting values corresponding to the six work setting values are set to "1". In the setting example 3, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values “0”, “1”, and “2” are set to “1”, and the work setting values “3”, “4”, “ This shows a case where the display probability setting value corresponding to "5" is set to "2". In setting example 4, work setting values “0”, “1”
The display probability setting value corresponding to "" is set to "1", and the work setting values "2" and "3"
In this example, the display probability setting value corresponding to "1" is set to "2", and the display probability setting value corresponding to the work setting values "4" and "5" is set to "3".

In the setting example 1, since the display probability setting value changes each time the RAM initialization switch 112 as the setting value change switch is pressed, the operator operates the RAM initialization switch 112 to operate the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100). Can be identified as reacting.

On the other hand, in setting example 2, regardless of the value of the work setting value, all the display probability setting values are “1.
Therefore, the display probability setting value before and after the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed is “1”.
It does not change, and it is impossible to identify whether or not the display of the performance display device 152 (display unit) responds to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 by the operator. In the setting example 3 as well, the work setting values are “0” to “1”, “1” to “2”, “3” to “4”, “4”.
It is impossible to identify whether or not the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation when changing from "5" to "5". Further, also in the setting example 4, the work setting values are changed from “0” to “1”.
, ”“ 2 ”to“ 3 ”, and“ 4 ”to“ 5 ”, it is impossible to identify whether or not the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100) responds to the operation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, each time the work setting value is changed, the display probability setting value is temporarily displayed by the RAM initialization switch 11.
By making the display different from that before and after pressing 2, the game machine 10 (game control device 100) can be identified whether or not it is reacting to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation processing of the present embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, but before and after changing the work setting value (and the display probability setting value), the intermediate data (intermediate data) is set as the probability setting value display data. The feature is that (information) is transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152.

As shown in FIG. 68, the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “5”, and the probability setting value corresponding to the work setting value is set. After updating the probability setting values 1 to 6 of the area by +1 (A2410), intermediate data is set as the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area (A2411), and the set probability setting value display data (intermediate data ) Is output (A2412). In this case, the performance display device 152 is in a display mode based on the intermediate data until the next probability setting value display data is output (A2404). When the time for displaying the intermediate data is too short to be recognized by the operator, the probability setting value display data (intermediate data) may be output and then a timer for delaying the predetermined time may be activated.

As the display mode of the intermediate data, an LED (light-emitting member: here, 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp for displaying the number of each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152, etc. ) To turn off all the LEDs (FIGS. 69 and 70), and to turn on all the LEDs (FIG. 71)
), There is a display mode (FIG. 72) (different from the display mode showing the display probability setting value) in which a part of the LEDs is turned on.

There is also a display mode in which the display of the display probability setting value is left as it is and at least one of the LEDs at a digit different from the digit displaying the display probability setting value is caused to emit light (FIG. 73).

Further, during the setting change, the information of the display probability set value transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152 by the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) includes LEDs (segments a, b) for displaying the display probability set value. , C, d, e, f, g), and not only the lighting pattern data for lighting L
Dot data (Dp) that lights the dot-shaped LED (segment Dp) at the lower right of ED
= 1) (additional information) is included. Therefore, as the intermediate data, a display mode (FIG. 74) in which all the LEDs configuring the performance display device 152 including the dots are turned off, the segment Dp
There is also a display mode (FIG. 75) in which all the other LEDs are extinguished while maintaining the lighting.

By the way, the game control device 100 transmits the information of the work set value (probability set value) after the setting change to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIG. 6B, A1044), and this effect control device 30.
0 is received (FIG. 50, B1323) and can be used as an effect setting value (effect setting value). Then, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 67, the work setting value “0”.
The production control information "1" to "6" corresponding to "5" to "5" are provided as production setting values.
Here, the effect control device 300 can make the effects different based on the effect control information “1” to “6” as effect setting values. For example, in the variable effect setting process of FIG. 55, the effect content is set based on the set value. As a result, the attraction control information is changed every time the probability setting value is changed to give a variation to the attraction, so that the interest in the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

[Display example of performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG. 69 is LE that constitutes the performance display device 152.
It is provided with a display mode in which all D are turned off.

Further, the probability setting value display data includes the character “S” at the digit 3 and the character “2” at the digit 2 of the performance display device 152.
The LED lights so that the letter "E", the letter "T" appear in digit 1 (let the letter "SET" appear), and the current probability setting value for display appears in digit 0. Is provided. Further, in the probability setting value display data, the LED of digit 1, digit 2, and digit 3 is turned off, and the value of the current probability setting value for display appears in digit 0 (may be displayed in another digit). LE
It is also possible to provide a display mode in which D is lit.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on, the setting change mode (setting change state) is set. In this case, the game control device 1
The probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c of 00 (here, any one of "1" to "6" corresponds to a value obtained by adding 1 to the last final work setting value). Is read out, and the character "S" is displayed in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character "E" is displayed in the digit 2 and the character "
The character "T" appears, the value "1" of one kind of display probability setting value is lit and displayed at the digit 0, and the character "SET1" is lit and displayed as a whole. When the setting variable state (setting change mode) is entered, the work setting value area (RAM 111c or register) has a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (one subtracted from the probability setting value). Value) may be stored.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (for example, “0” to “1”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time. Alternatively, the display probability setting value “1” may be temporarily turned off while the lighting of “SET” is maintained.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "1"). Is lit up.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (for example, "
1 ”to“ 2 ”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2"). Is lit up.

As described above, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the character “SET1” including the display probability setting value “1” can be temporarily turned off and then turned on again. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off. Also, each time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value in the work setting value area is changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the work setting value is updated to the last. The corresponding probability set value is stored in the probability set value area.

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 or the setting example 3 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.

First, in FIG. 70, a case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 3 and the work setting value at the start of the setting change is “1” will be considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) has a display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “1”.
The character “SET1” including “” is lit and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (“1”).
"2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2") is displayed. Lights up and is displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (“2” to “3”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "3" is lit and displayed. This allows the worker to
It is possible to visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from “1” to “2” by pressing the initialization switch 112.

As described above, every time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability set value is (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 2 → 1 → ...) accompanying the change of the work set value. In addition to the above change, the display probability setting value is temporarily turned off when the value is switched, then the next display probability setting value is displayed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the display probability setting values are turned off.

Next, in FIG. 70, a case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 4 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “0” will be considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) has a display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “0”.
The character “SET1” including “” is lit and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (“0”).
"1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value "1" is lit and displayed. It

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (“1” to “2”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character “SET2” including the changed display probability setting value “2” corresponding to the changed work setting value “2” is lit up and displayed. As a result, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from “1” to “2” by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. After that, although not shown, the RAM initialization switch 112
When is pressed twice, the character "SET3" including the display probability setting value "3" corresponding to the work setting value "4" is lit and displayed.

As described above, every time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability set value is (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 3 → 3 → 1 → ...・) And so on. Further, when the value of the display probability set value is switched, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined time, and then the next display probability set value is lit and displayed. Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are turned off.

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. Although the modified example described below will be described by taking the setting example 2 as an example, it is also applicable to the setting example 1, the setting example 3, and the setting example 4.

In the first modification, the intermediate data is the performance display device 1 contrary to FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70).
All the LEDs in the digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0 of 52 are lit and displayed (at least digit 3
, The digit 2 or the digit 1 may be lit up and displayed). On the other hand, in the probability setting value display data, at the digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 of the performance display device 152, all the LEDs are turned off (a mode in which the character “SET” is displayed as described above) and the digit 0 is displayed. A display mode is provided in which an LED that constitutes the display of the display probability set value is turned on.

The display mode of the display probability setting value in the first modified example transits similarly to FIG. 70. On the other hand, R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is pressed, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0 for a predetermined time are turned on by the intermediate data, and then the changed display probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on. Turn on for a predetermined time.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing a second modified example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second modification shown in FIG. 72 makes a transition similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability setting value, and has a display mode different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change.

As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has, for example, a display mode in which only the LED (segment g) of digit 0 is turned on. In addition, in the second modification, any display mode other than the display indicating the display probability setting value can be applied. Further, the other digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) may be arbitrarily displayed by the intermediate data.

Therefore, every time the operator depresses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead the LED at the specific position of digit 0 (for example, segment g).
Lights for a predetermined time.

FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing a third modified example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The third modification example shown in FIG. 73 transits in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed in a digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) different from the digit (digit 0) in which the display probability setting value is displayed, and in the digit 0, the display probability setting value The display is maintained. That is, the intermediate data is different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change as a whole, but in the digit displaying the display probability setting value, the display probability setting value before the change is set. It is a display mode for sharing information.

In the third modified example, the game control device 100, the information of the display probability setting value (digit 0) stored in the probability setting value display data area and the intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2,) according to the third modified example. Digit 1
) Are combined and the combined data (intermediate data) is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (executed in A2411 in FIG. 68).

As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data is provided with a display mode in which all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are turned on, and as the synthetic data, all of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are displayed. LED
Is turned on, and the LED for displaying the display probability setting value before change is turned on at the digit 0. In the probability setting value display data, the probability setting value is lit up and displayed at digit 0, digit 3 and digit 2
Although the digit 1 has a display mode in which it is turned off, the character "SET" may be displayed in the same manner as described above.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of the digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are lit for a predetermined time, and the lit display of the display probability setting value during that time is also maintained.

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 makes a transition similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display by the display probability setting value (additional information).

In the fourth modified example, the game control device 100 has the RAM initialization switch 11 as described above.
2 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on and the gaming machine 10 is powered on to enter the setting variable state (first state). At this time, the game control device 100 adds dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information) to the probability setting value display data. Thereby, it is possible to indicate that the displayed probability setting value “1.” that is displayed is a provisional value whose setting is being changed.

On the other hand, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the performance display device 152
LED for displaying “SET” of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and probability setting value for display of digit 0 “1”
The LED for displaying "" and the LED for displaying the dot of digit 0 (segment Dp) are turned off for a predetermined time.

By turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting is completed (second state). At this time, the game control device 100 displays the probability setting value display data (including the dot data (Dp = 0)) after the setting is changed (after the confirmation) (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1 “ SET "
The display probability setting value "1" after the setting change is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display probability setting value "1" is set in the probability setting display data area. The lit display of "is turned off.

FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modified example of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modification shown in FIG. 75 makes a transition similar to the display mode of the fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 except for the display by intermediate data.

On the other hand, as the intermediate data, an LED for displaying “SET” of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 and digit 0
LED that displays the probability setting value for display of is turned off, and dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information)
A display mode is provided in which the LED (segment Dp) for displaying is turned on. Therefore, RAM
Each time the initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LED for displaying the characters "SET" of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 and the LED for displaying the probability setting value for display of digit 0 are turned off in the performance display device 152. The LED (segment Dp) that displays the dot of digit 0 is kept lit. Therefore, it can be easily identified that the display of the performance display device 152 responds to the operation and the setting is being changed.

[Operation / Effect of Second Embodiment]
The present embodiment is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition), and when the result of the game is a special result, In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player,
Setting by changing the setting values (work setting value, probability setting value) according to the settings relating to the game (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93), and illuminating the light emitting member (LED) And a display unit (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information about values (information corresponding to the jackpot probability, display probability setting value), and the setting changing unit sets the setting value (
A first switch (RAM initialization switch 112) for changing the work setting value is provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) has a first switch (RAM initialization switch 11).
The setting value (working setting value) is changed in response to the operation 2), and information on the changed setting value (display probability setting value) can be displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152). When changing a value (work setting value), intermediate information (intermediate data) different from the information about the setting value before the change (probability setting value for display) and the information about the setting value after change (probability setting value for display) )
Is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152), and then information on the changed setting value (display probability setting value) is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152).

With the above configuration, before and after the change of the probability setting value, the intermediate data whose display mode is different from the information regarding the setting value before and after the change (probability setting value for display) is temporarily displayed. It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) responds to the operation of the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) is the same regardless of the set value (work setting value), and corresponds to the probability value that the game has a special result.

In the above-mentioned configuration, the information regarding the set value (probability set value for display) is not changed before and after the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed, but since the intermediate data is displayed, the operation unit (RAM initial Display unit (performance display device 15)
It is possible to identify whether or not the display of 2) is reacting.

The present embodiment is characterized in that the intermediate information (intermediate data) is information for turning off all the light emitting members (LEDs) or information for turning on all the light emitting members.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify the change from the information about the set value before the change (display probability set value) to the information about the changed set value (display probability set value).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits, and the intermediate information (
The intermediate data) is displayed in a digit different from the digit for displaying the information about the set value (display probability set value).

With the above configuration, the display of the intermediate data indicates that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to an operation, and the information about the set value (probability set value for display) is not erased. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the probability setting value).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has additional information (Dp = Dp =) that is different from the information about the set value (display probability set value) and the information about the set value (display probability set value).
1) can be displayed, and the setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is for changing the setting value (working setting value) to a setting variable state. The second switch (setting key switch 93) is provided with a second state (setting key switch 93), a first state permitting a transition to the setting variable state, and a second state ending the setting variable state. The state can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) the additional information (Dp = 1) together with the information about the set value (display probability set value) in the first state, In the second state, transmission (display) of additional information is stopped (dot data (Dp
= 0)), and the intermediate information (intermediate data) is additional information (dot data (Dp = 1))
Includes.

With the above configuration, even if the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed during the setting change, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the setting is being changed is maintained without being turned off. The reliability of the display indicating can be improved.

In the present embodiment, effect control means (effect control device 30 for controlling effects related to the game).
0), the production control means (production control device 300) controls the production based on a set value (work setting value), and the game control means (game control device 100) sets the changed set value ( Information about the final work setting value and probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

With the above configuration, since the effect corresponding to the changed set value can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine 10 by giving a variation to the effect.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first and second embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The third embodiment relates to acceptance of an input in the setting change state.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
First, the probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the third embodiment.

The probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the third embodiment includes the probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the first embodiment.
In addition to the confirmation process, the processes of A2601 and A2602 are added.

After performing the processing from step A2401 to step A2410 as described above in the probability setting change / confirmation processing according to the first embodiment, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a predetermined switch input (A2601). ). The input of the predetermined switch is, for example, an input of a starting opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a), a gate switch 34a, and winning opening switches 35a to 35n. In addition, the input of the predetermined switch, such as the specific area switch 72, the special winning opening switch 43 of the special variation winning device 38, 39, the remaining ball outlet switch 73, the out ball detection switch 74, such as interface chip (proximity I / F ) 12
1 may be included (see FIG. 3).

When there is a predetermined switch input (result of A2601 is “Y”), the game control device 1
00 executes the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), and ends the probability setting change / confirmation process.

In the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command indicating that there is a switch input to the effect control device 300. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 by the processing of step B3302 of the one-shot system command processing to be described later, thereby turning on the start port LED and the like. Similarly, the game control device 100 has a second driver 138b and a third driver 138.
An on / off drive signal may be output to the collective display device 50 via c to light the collective display device 50.

On the other hand, if there is no input from the predetermined switch (result of A2601 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change / confirmation process as it is.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

In the one-shot system command process according to the third embodiment, the processes of B3301 and B3302 are added in addition to the one-shot system command process according to the first embodiment.

After performing the processing from step B1301 to step B1327 as described above in the one-shot system command processing according to the first embodiment, the performance control device 300 does not display the command of the setting confirmation system in the MODE section (B1327). Result of “N”), the MODE section determines whether it is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE part is within the range of the switch input command, the effect control device 300 has received the switch input command from the game control device 100 and determines that there is a switch input.

When the MODE part represents a switch input command (result of B3301 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the switch input process (B3302), and then ends the single shot system command process.

In the switch input process (B3302), the effect control device 300 lights the start opening LED or displays check items on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the switch input command. When the production control device 300 receives the switch input command, the decoration LEDs are sequentially turned on, the movable accessory or the speaker 19 (the upper speaker 19a, the lower speaker 1).
9b) may be activated.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the switch input command (result of B3301 is “N”), the effect control device 300, after the step B1329 as described above in the single-shot system command processing according to the first embodiment. Process.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
Details of the hall / player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hall / player setting mode processing according to the third embodiment. By the hall / player setting mode process, a hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game shop) can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 or a player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. be able to.

Rendering control device 300 first determines whether or not in the hall setting mode (B0401).
). When the hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is being executed. When in the hall setting mode (result of B0401 is “Y”), B0
After performing the processing of 406-B0416, the production button 25 (
Various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button switch 25a and the touch panel 25b).

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is “N”).
), It is determined whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B0402). When a player setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being executed. When in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is “Y”), the processes of B0420-B0425 are performed to perform various settings and various adjustments based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

Production control device 300, when the player setting mode is not in (the result of B0402 is "N").
), It is determined whether the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0403). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input processing (B0010) while waiting for customers or in the setting change state, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. You can judge that you did. It should be noted that “waiting for customers” means a state in which a video for waiting for customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41, for example. Further, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened in the setting change state (error related to front frame opening error / command of illegal system is received (B1316)), effect button input processing (B0010). )
Alternatively, the hall setting mode may be entered when the operation of the effect button 25 is detected as an operation signal. When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is “N”), the processing of B0417 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen to start screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is “Y”). Start setting is performed (B0404). Then, the hall setting mode flag is set (B0405).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts and sets the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall.
B0406), hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B0407) for adjusting and setting the brightness of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and liquid crystal brightness for adjusting and setting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display etc.) of the display device 41. The adjustment processing (B0408) and the power saving setting processing (B0409) for setting the power saving are executed. The volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, the set value of the brightness of the display device 41, and the set value of the power saving setting are set values in the hall setting mode.

Next, effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411).
). The operation signal generated by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is an effect button input process (B0010).
If it is detected in step 3, it can be determined that there is a setting confirmation operation input. If there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B0411 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.

Production control device 300, when there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is “Y”).
), It is determined whether or not it has been confirmed by the setting at the time of factory shipment (B0412). If there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. When it is not confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B0412 is “N”), the process proceeds to B0414. When it is confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B0412 is “Y”), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and adjustments with the factory default setting is executed (B0413). The factory settings are the default settings stored in the memory such as the ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or the hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various brightness determined in B0406-B0410 or B0413 is written in the backup memory (eg FeRAM 323) (B0414).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the hole setting mode flag is cleared (B0416).

Production control device 300, if the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B040.
The result of 3 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417).
). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for the customer. If the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B
The result of 0417 is "N"), and the hall / player setting mode processing is ended.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment processing (B0420) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED brightness adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customizing process described later that customizes (individually sets) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B0422).
Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0423). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (result of B0423 is “N”), the hall / player setting mode process is ended.
When the setting confirmation operation is input (the result of B0423 is “Y”), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is made (B042).
4). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0425). Note that B042
The player setting data (or the player adjustment data) such as the volume and the brightness determined in 0-B0421 may be erased, and thus is not written in the backup memory.

In the above, the drawing update setting (such as updating the highlight item in the menu display) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (B
0010).

[Game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in the setting change state according to the third embodiment.

In the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, LEDs (light-emitting diodes) of the board decoration device 46 capable of emitting light as shown in FIG. 79 are provided in front of the universal figure starting gate 34 and each. They are provided in front of the general winning opening 35 and respectively. The LED provided in front of the universal figure starting gate 34 is a universal figure starting gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is a general winning edge LED 35L.

When the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment enters the setting change state, the effect control device 300 receives a command that the probability setting is being changed, and the display screen of the display device 41 indicates that the setting is being changed. Characters are displayed (B1326 setting change system information setting process).

Here, when the game control device 100 is in the setting change state (setting change state, setting change mode), steps A2601 and A2 of the probability setting change / confirmation processing as described above with reference to FIG. 76.
In the processing of 602, the gate switch 34a, which is an input different from the input relating to the change of the set value
Also functions as a control means capable of accepting inputs from the winning opening switches 35a to 35n.
Then, the game control device 100, the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switch 35a ~ 35n
When the input from is received, a switch input command corresponding to the received input is transmitted to effect control device 300.

Then, the effect control device 300, the step B3301 of the one-shot system command processing of FIG.
In the process of B3302, when the switch input command from the game control device 100 is received, the LED of the panel decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command (the universal figure starting gate LED 34
L or general winning port LED 35L) is lit or blinked.

Therefore, in the setting change state, by passing or winning the game ball through the universal figure starting gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding universal figure starting gate LED 34L or general winning edge LED 35L lights up or blinks, The operation check can be easily performed, and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the gaming machine 10 at the time of factory shipment, so that the gaming machine 10 having an initial failure can be detected early.

In addition, the effect control device 300, the LE of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command.
D (universal figure starting gate LED34L or general winning a prize LED35L) may be lit or blinked, and then other unsupported LEDs may be lit or blinked in order. According to such an aspect, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LEDs of various panel decoration devices 46 simply by receiving one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100. Therefore, maintenance of the gaming machine 10 is performed. It is possible to improve the sex.

In addition, the game control device 100, the gate switch 34a and winning a prize switch 35a-35n
In response to receiving an input from the display unit 51 to 60 (LED
Lamp, special figure 1 indicator 51, special figure 2 indicator 52, public figure display section 53, special figure 1 hold indicator 54
, Special figure 2 hold indicator 55, public figure hold indicator 56, first game state display section 57, second game state display section 58, third game state display section 59, round display section 60) are appropriately turned on or blinking. You may let me. The game control device 100 turns on or blinks the display unit (one of the display units 51 to 60) of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the received input, and then all the display units (display units 51 to 60). May be lit or blinked to check the operation of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 (processing of A2602). Further, the operation check of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 is not limited to the mode of all lighting or all blinking, but may be the mode of cyclic lighting so that it is easy to confirm that light is normally emitted.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and performs the switch input time process (B3302), as shown in FIG. 79, the display device 41.
The check table may be displayed on the display screen of. In the check table, for each switch item corresponding to the received input, a normal operation checked display such as "○" is displayed.

The effect control device 300 starts the check table as shown in FIG. 79 in response to the game control device 100 accepting the input of the start opening switch (start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a). Normal operation checked display (“○”) on the mouth 1 and starting mouth 2 items
May be displayed.

Further, an LED (starting winning opening LED 36L) of the panel decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and the LED is turned on in accordance with a corresponding switch input command. Alternatively, it may blink. Furthermore, the production control device 300 is
The speaker 19 (upper speaker 1
9a and the lower speaker 19b) may be operated. At that time, the effect control device 300 can, for example, when the switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a is received, give a voice notification as "Universal figure starting gate!", And when the switch input command corresponding to the winning opening switches 35a to 35n is received. You can make a voice alert saying "General prize!"

Further, while the setting is being changed, the game control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 that is output when the front frame 12 and the like are open, and issues an error / illegal command to the effect control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the operation of the effect button 25 during the transmission, the effect control device 300 determines that the process of step B0403 of the hall / player setting mode process is established as described above with reference to FIG. 78. Judge (the result of B0403 is "Y")
).

Therefore, the effect control device 300 will execute the processing of step B0404 and thereafter, so that the hall setting can be performed during the setting change. In this way, the game control device 100
Functions as a control unit capable of accepting a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 as an input different from the input regarding the change of the set value in the setting change state. Further, the effect control device 300 accepts the operation of the effect button 25 in a state where the front frame 12 and the like are open, and thus accepts the input related to the hall setting as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state, It functions as a control unit capable of changing the set value of the hall setting (for example, the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, etc.).

[Another example of a game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 80 is another example of the front view of the game board 30 during the setting change according to the third embodiment.

In the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 80, in addition to the universal figure starting gate LED 34L, the general winning opening LED 35L, the starting winning opening LED 36L, the universal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation. The winning LED 38L and the second special variation winning LED 39L are also caused to emit light. The universal figure variable prize LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal variable prize device 37 (starting opening 2, second starting winning opening). The first special variable prize LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable prize device 38, and the second special variable prize LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable prize device 39.

The normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, and the second special variation winning device 39 whose settings are being changed are closed by a slide opening / closing movable member 37b and attacker-type opening / closing doors 38c, 39c, respectively.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 lights or blinks the universal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, and the second special variation winning LED 39L in response to the production button 25 or the like being pressed during the setting change, for example. Can be made In addition, general figure variation winning LED 3
Lighting of the 7L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, the second special variation winning LED 39L, and the like may be performed in order or at the same time.

Further, when there is a predetermined switch input (result of A2601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b and the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c to open the normal variation winning device 37 and the first prize. The game balls may be directly awarded to the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39.

Further, in the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300 can cause the upper effect unit LED 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL that are the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 to emit light. The upper effect unit LED 40cL is an L provided in the upper effect unit 40c.
It is ED. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade portion of the sword held by the character of the side effect unit 40d. The effect control device 300 turns on or blinks the upper effect unit LED 40cL or the side effect unit LED 40dL in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed during the setting change, for example. In addition, upper production unit LED
The lighting of 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL may be performed sequentially or simultaneously.

In this way, by making the LED of the accessory (decorative member) emit light in addition to the LED of the winning port or the prize winning device, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LED of the accessory (decorative member) of the gaming machine 10. The maintainability can be improved. It should be noted that the maintainability may be further improved by moving the movable accessory or the like as an effect device during light emission so that the motor of the movable accessory or the like can be normally operated.

Further, the effect control device 300, for example, in response to pressing the effect button 25 or the like during the setting change, the lamp display device 80 (lamp display unit 1 to the lamp display unit 1 to the lower right side of the game area 32.
6 (LED)) may be combined to emit light.

[Operation / Effect of Third Embodiment]
Gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, identification information (identification information, decoration special design, decoration first design A ~
C, a special game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player is generated when the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which this special map is variably displayed is the special result (big hit result) It is possible. The gaming machine 10 is a control means (game control device 100, which controls the game).
The production control device 300), and the setting changing means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value relating to the game condition. The control means can accept an input different from the input relating to the change of the set value when the set value is changeable by the setting change means (setting change state, setting change mode).

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the control means can accept an input relating to the management and maintenance of the gaming machine 10 such as hall setting and operation check when the setting value is in a setting changeable state. The manageability and maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) has a predetermined input (front frame opening) as an input different from the input relating to the change of the set value during the setting change state. Upon receiving the signal from the detection switch 64 and the signal from the effect button 25, it is possible to change not only the set value but also the set value different from the set value (set value in the hall setting) during the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the setting value of the hall setting and the like can be changed as a setting value different from the setting value relating to the game condition in the setting change state, so that the person in charge of the game hall (gaming store) It is possible to improve maintainability. In addition, normally, the setting change state is transferred by the operation of the person in charge at the game hall (game shop), so by making it possible to change the set value of the hall setting in the setting change state, It is possible to prevent the setting value of the hall setting from being unnecessarily changed by a person who is not the person in charge of.

Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is capable of emitting light (a light emitting device (LED of the board decoration device 46 (
In particular, in addition to the first start winning opening 36 and the LED before the second starting winning opening), the collective display device 50
Display units 51 to 60), a predetermined area provided in the game area 32, in which the game ball can enter or pass, and a detection unit capable of detecting the entrance or passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. .. When the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) receives an input from the detection means as a different input, it causes the light emitting device to emit light.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to easily check the operation that the various detecting means can normally detect the game ball and that the various light emitting devices normally emit light in the setting change state. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (LEDs for the board decoration device 46 and other production devices) are provided. Control means (game control device 100, production control device 300),
It is possible to sequentially change the display of the plurality of light emitting devices in a predetermined display mode (for example, light emission) during the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, the effect control device 300 only receives one of the switch input commands from the gaming control device 100, and various light emitting devices (of the panel decoration device 46 are displayed during the setting change state). Since it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the LED and the performance device, the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided in an effect device (a display device 41, a board decoration device 46, a lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying a display relating to an effect, and a game ball is provided in the game area 32. Predetermined area that can enter or pass (universal figure starting gate 34, each general winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), second starting winning opening (second starting winning area of normal variation winning device 37) (Winning area) and the like) and detecting means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switches 35a to 35n, starting opening switch, etc.) capable of detecting entry or passage of a game ball to a predetermined area. When the control unit receives an input from the detection unit as a different input, the display of the effect device can be changed to a predetermined display mode (LED emission, normal operation checked display on the check table).

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, in the setting change state, by passing or entering a game ball into the universal figure starting gate 34, each general winning opening 35 or the like as a predetermined area, the corresponding universal figure is obtained. The start gate LED 34L and the general winning opening LED 35L can be lit or blinked, and a check table for passing or entering the ball can be displayed on the display device 41, so that an operation check can be performed easily and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. You can As a result, for example, it becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the gaming machine 10 at the time of factory shipment, so that the gaming machine 10 having an initial failure can be detected early.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is a production device capable of performing production (in addition to the LEDs of the display device 41 and the board decoration device 46, the speaker 19, the top production of the board production device 44 (movable accessory, etc.). Unit 40c, side effect unit 40d, etc.). Control means (production control device 300
) Is capable of operating the production device in the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, the LED of the board decoration device 46 is used as a production device.
In addition to the light emission from the speaker 19, the speaker 19 informs the voice, and when the light is emitted, the movable accessory or the like is moved as a production device, so that when the setting is changed, the LED operation of the board production device 44 is checked and the speaker is activated. It is possible to easily check the operation of the motors such as 19 and the movable accessory, and it is possible to further improve the maintainability of the gaming machine 10.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiment,
The same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and the description will be omitted while omitting the duplicated description as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the operation of the gaming machine 10 when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the power is restored.

[Timing chart in special game state of normal operation]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output and the like in the normal operation special game state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of timings of signal output and the like in the special game state of normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 81, at the time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, external information in the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 37) or the special figure 2 displaying process (FIG. 38). As the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) saved in the output data area, for example, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. The signal relating to the start of the big hit is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and then to an external device (hall computer or the like). Specifically, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are started when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes the big hit result (special result). In addition, the gaming machine 10
The power supply of is kept on and the security signal is off.

When the big hit 1 signal is the big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 37) is performed.
) Fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing (A5714) is saved in the external information output data area, or if the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2 displaying processing (FIG. 38) fanfare / It is saved in the external information output data area in the processing shift setting processing during the interval (A5816). The big hit 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 37) when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. In the case of,
In step A5811), the data is saved in the external information output data area.

When the first big hit ends at time t2, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Specifically, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is that the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area by the end of the special game state, that is, the jackpot end processing (FIG. 40, FIG. 41) after the round game. Then it will be turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (universal support state, specific game state) or a probable change state (specific game state, stochastic fluctuation state), and the output of the big jack 2 signal remains on To be done.

Specifically, when the big hit 1 signal off data is the end of the big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Therefore, step A6112 of the special figure 1 big hit end processing (FIG. 40). Is saved in the external information output data area. When the big hit 1 signal off data is the end of the big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Therefore, in step A6212 of the special figure 2 big hit end processing (FIG. 41), external information is output. It is saved in the output data area.

When the big hit 2 signal is in the time saving state after the big hit ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the big hit end setting process 2, and the output (on state) continues.
In addition, when the big hit 2 signal becomes the probability change state after the big hit ends, big hit end setting processing 3
In step A6801, the data is saved in the external information output data area and the output (on state) continues.

Then, at the time t3, when the big hit occurs again, that is, the second big hit occurs, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned on.

Then, at the time t4, when the second big hit ends, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Also, the second big hit corresponds to a normal big hit pattern (for example, a 10R normal big hit pattern), and the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, and there is no specific area passage information (
The result of A6104 is "N" (no V winning), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6
103). Therefore, after the second big hit is over, it will be in a time saving state (universal power support state).

After that, at time t5, when the variable display game in the time saving state reaches 100 times, for example, after the second big hit ends, the remaining number of games in the time saving state (time reduction variation number) becomes 0, and the time saving state ends. To do. At this time, the output of the two big hit signals is turned off by saving the off data of the two big hit signals in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time shortening variation number updating process. Further, when the game including the special game state and the like is performed in the normal operation, the power of the gaming machine 10 is maintained in the on state, and the security signal remains off.

Note that, unlike the above, when the probability variation state is reached after the second big hit ends, the probability variation state ends when the falling lottery is won in the falling lottery process (FIG. 20), and at that time, the jackpot 2 signal is output. , By saving the big data of 2 signals off to the external information output data area (
A3704), it turns off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after power failure in special gaming state]
With reference to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state and the power is restored normally will be described. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of timings of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and the power is restored normally. Note that in FIGS. 82 to 86 below, the description overlapping with the content described in FIG. 81 and the like will be appropriately omitted.

At time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are output, as in FIG. 81 described above. Further, the security signal is maintained in the off state.

At time t11, when a power failure occurs during the first big hit (for example, during a round game), FIG.
As shown in 2, the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, and the big hit game is interrupted. Further, as the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t12, when power is restored (power failure is restored) and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure restoration processing (A1045) of the main processing. The output state (ON state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved (stored) in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and the game control device 100 outputs the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal at the time of power restoration. Saved data (stored information) about the output state, that is, the big hit state is internally held (maintained). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal that were on before the power failure were turned on, and the first jackpot game was restarted.

At the time t13, when the first big hit ends, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (universal power support state) or a probability changing state (specific game state, probability changing state), and the output of two big hit signals is kept on.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t14 to time t16 is
This is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above with reference to FIG.

Even when the power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability changing state, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are similarly turned off. Then, when the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure restoration processing (A1045) of the main processing, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability variation state is restarted. can do.

[Timing chart when a memory abnormality occurs after a power failure in the special gaming state]
With reference to FIG. 83, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and a memory abnormality occurs in power recovery will be described. FIG. 83 shows the fourth
It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output etc. when a power failure occurs at the time of a special game state which concerns on embodiment, and a memory abnormality occurs at power recovery.

At time t1, the first big hit (special game state) occurs and the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are output at time t1 and then a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t21. When it occurs, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

At time t22, when the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the RAM (here, RA
When the memory abnormality of M111c) occurs, the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is set in the main processing (A102).
The result of 2 is “Y”), and ON data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal (
A1026). Further, while the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeatedly waited, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegality of the RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) in the RAM as save data (stored information) at the time of power failure is read by the power failure recovery process at the time of power recovery. Therefore, when the normal condition is restored, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals can be output as shown by the broken line in FIG. However, since the memory abnormality of the RAM has occurred, the game control device 100 turns on the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83, while holding one jackpot signal as shown by the broken line in FIG. And the jackpot 2 signals are not output.

After that, at time t23, when the power is once turned off, and when it is thereafter determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on) (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the state is changed to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state), the probability setting value is cleared due to the RAM abnormality (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, the setting key switch 93 is turned off (A1036
When the setting change state ends, the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (A1042) and initialized (A1043, A1044).
Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Further, the memory abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is resolved. On the other hand, the jackpot state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol is also a detached symbol.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the second big hit, a time saving state or a probability changing state, similarly, a memory abnormality occurs, RAM clearing and initialization are performed, and the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state. Become.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting confirmation state after a power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, a timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, a normal recovery is performed by power recovery, and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered will be described. To do. 84, a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment,
6 is a timing chart showing an example of timings of signal output and the like when the power is restored to a normal state and a setting confirmation state is entered.

81. At time t1, after the first big hit occurs and the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are output at time t1, the power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t31, the gaming machine 10
When the power is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t32, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (the RAM initialization switch 112 is off) and the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting confirmation flag is set. Then, (A1032), the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be confirmed (A1305).

When shifting to the setting confirmation state at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83 (A2406).

As described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of a power failure (A1057, A1058), and when the power is restored, the state shown in FIG.
As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 4, save data relating to the output state (ON state) of one big hit signal and two big hit signals is held.

Then, at time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (A1036).
When the result of (4) is “Y”), and the power failure recovery processing is performed (A1045), the security signal is turned off.

Also, the output status of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) in the RAM as save data (stored information) at the time of power failure is read in the power failure recovery processing and turned on after the setting confirmation status is completed. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first big hit game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the big hit game (special game) when the normal operation is performed without the occurrence of a power failure is consumed over the same time.

At the time t34, when the first big hit ends, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (universal electric power support state) or a probability changing state (specific game state, probability changing state), and the output of two big hit signals is kept on.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t35 to time t36 is
This is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above with reference to FIG.

If a power failure occurs during the second big hit, a short-time condition or a probability change condition, and the power is restored and the system moves to the setting confirmation state, when the setting confirmation state ends, the power failure recovery process (A1
By 045), the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability changing state can be restarted.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special game state, a normal output is restored by power recovery, and a signal output when shifting to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), The timing of will be described. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored normally, and the setting is changed.

At time t1, after the first big hit occurs and the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are output at time t1 and then the power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t41, the gaming machine 10
When the power is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t42, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (turned on) and the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting is changed. The medium flag is set (A1029), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (A1305).

When shifting to the setting change state at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 85 (A2406).

As described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of a power failure (A1057, A1058), and when the power is restored, the state shown in FIG.
As indicated by a broken line in FIG. 5, save data relating to the output state (ON state) of one big hit signal and two big hit signals is held.

Then, at time t43, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (A10
The result of No. 36 is "Y"), and the probability setting changing flag is set (A1040).
Result of "Y"), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (
A1042) is initialized (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, when the setting change state ends, the jackpot state is reset by the RAM clearing, which is a normal recovery, and becomes the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol also becomes a symbol.

Even when a power failure occurs during the second big hit, a time saving state or a probability changing state, when the setting change state ends, RAM clearing and initialization are performed, and the gaming machine 10 is in the normal game state. Becomes

[Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after the power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is turned off after the power is restored after the power is restored to normal by power restoration. The timing of signal output and the like when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 86 is an example of the timing of signal output when the power is turned off after a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored normally after the power is restored, and the setting is changed. 3 is a timing chart showing

The signal output when a power failure occurs after the first big hit from time t1 to time t52 and the power is restored in the setting changed state is similar to the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above with reference to FIG. 85. Note that, at the time t52, when shifting to the setting change state, the time t42 in FIG.
Similarly, the probability setting changing flag is set (A1029).

After that, at time t53, when the power is turned off (or another power failure occurs) in the setting change state, the output of the security signal is turned off. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 85, as in the broken lines up to FIG. 84, save data regarding the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is held. Further, since the save data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the broken lines of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are off when the power is turned off. The probability setting changing flag remains set (A10).
The result of 37 is "Y", A1057, A1058).

At time t54, the RAM initialization switch 112 is not turned on (A1021).
When the power is turned on, the probability setting changing flag is set (result of A1023 is “Y”), and the ON data of the security signal is output (A).
1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are output as save data in the RAM as shown by the broken line in FIG. 86 (
ON state) is held, but it is not output. Also, steps A1025 and A
While the process of 1026 is repeated and waiting, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so that the game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) from being reflected in the game. Thereafter, the RAM is cleared (A1042) in the same manner as at time t23 in FIG. 83, whereby the normal state can be restored, and at that time, the jackpot state is reset.

[Operation / Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, special figure variation display game, variation display game) is a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating (big hit game state) is provided. The game machine 10 is provided with a holding storage means (RAM of the game control device 100) capable of storing information about a game and storing and storing the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can output a signal (one big hit signal) triggered by the occurrence of the special gaming state, and hold during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. When an abnormality of the information recorded in the storage means is detected, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output and a signal (big hit 1
Signal) is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when an abnormality of the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after the power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. Does not output a signal (one big hit signal) that is output upon the occurrence of a special gaming state, but outputs a security signal, so that it is possible to inform that the gaming machine has been tampered with when the power is restored. ..
By the notification of fraud, the person in charge at the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against the fraud.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can output a signal (big hit 1 signal) triggered by the occurrence of a special game state (big hit game state), and a set value after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state. Outputs a security signal for notifying an abnormality during restart processing when a power failure occurs and power is restored in a setting change state (setting change mode, variable setting state) that can be changed. Is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, a signal (one big hit signal) output upon the occurrence of the special gaming state is not output during the restart process when the power is restored and the power is restored in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to inform that the game machine is performing an unexpected process in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against unexpected processing (processing for power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) performed on the gaming machine.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special game which is advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, special figure variation display game, variation display game) is a special result (big hit result). It is provided with control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (big hit game state) and a specific game state (time saving state, probability variation state). The gaming machine 10 stores information about a game, and holds and stores the stored information even if a power failure occurs (game control device 10
0 RAM). Control means signal when the special game state occurs (big signal 2 signals)
It is possible to start outputting, and the signal can be output until the specific game state after the special game state ends, and when the power is restored during the occurrence of the special game state or the specific game state, the power is restored again when the power is restored. When an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding / storage means is detected during the start-up process, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and no signal (2 signals for big hits) is output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, during the restart process when the power is restored, an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage unit is detected. When detected, the security signal is output without outputting the signal (two big hit signals) output when the special game state occurs, so that the game machine is fraudulent when the power is restored. You can inform that. By the notification of fraud, the person in charge at the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against the fraud.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can start outputting a signal (2 signals for big hit) upon occurrence of a special game state (big hit game state), and a specific game state (time saving state, probability changing state) after the special game state. The signal can be output until the end of, and the setting change state (the setting value can be changed after a power failure occurs during the special game state or the specific game state) (
During the restart process when a power failure occurs and power is restored in the setting change mode and setting variable state), the security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and the signal (2 signals for big hit) is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, a signal (two jackpot signals) output upon the occurrence of the special gaming state is not output during the restart process when the power is restored and the power is restored in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to inform that the game machine is performing an unexpected process in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against unexpected processing (processing for power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) performed on the gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalents of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 Production Button 30 Game Board 32 Game Area 36 First Start Winning Port (First Start Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board production device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 setting key switch 100 game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 Performance display device 200 Discharge control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

If a game control means capable of executing a game is provided and the result of the game is a special result,
In a gaming machine that can generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player,
Setting change means that can change the set value according to the settings related to the game,
A display unit capable of displaying information regarding the set value by causing the light emitting member to emit light,
The setting changing means includes a first switch for changing the set value,
The game control means,
It is possible to change the set value in response to the operation of the first switch and display information on the changed set value on the display unit.
When the setting value is changed, at least intermediate information different from the information on the setting value before the change is displayed on the display unit, and then the information on the setting value after the change is displayed on the display unit. And the gaming machine. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the intermediate information is information for turning off all the light emitting members or information for turning on all the light emitting members.